JP7150424B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

There is a conventional game machine that transmits a set value specifying command capable of specifying a set value to an effect control board that performs an effect, notifies the set value to the effect control board, and controls a setting suggestion effect. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, the effect control board that controls the setting suggestion effect is a board that controls the effect rather than the progress of the game. Since it is easy to take out the board from the case or the like and analyze it, if the set values stored in the performance control board are tampered with, there is a fear that an inappropriate setting suggesting performance will be performed .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing falsification of set values stored in performance control means .

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on the display of a specified result,
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of a setting value relating to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state with a probability according to the set value;
game information storage means capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling production based on control information transmitted from the game control means;
a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the set set value;
with
The game control means transmits set value control information including a set specific value based on the set value that is different from the set value set in the setting permission state as the control information capable of specifying the set value. capable of transmitting control information specifying termination of the setting permission state;
The production control means stores a setting specific value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means, and is capable of executing production according to the setting value specified from the setting specific value, Based on the reception of the control information specifying the end of the setting permission state transmitted from the game control means, performing special control according to the end of the setting permission state,
The game information includes pending storage information regarding variable display that has not yet started,
When a new setting value is set in the setting permission state, the game information including the pending storage information is erased,
The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect that can be executed in a plurality of variable displays after the set value is changed as the suggestive effect, and an initial suggestive effect in the identification information after the set value is changed, unlike the first suggestive effect. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect that suggests a set value by display,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting permission state control means (for example, when the CPU 103 is Sa13 part that executes the setting change processing) and
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state by the probability according to the set setting value;
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the background effect (set value suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 20-46 in the morning) When,
with
The game control means, as the control information that can specify the setting value, a setting specific value (for example, setting value designation (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the command control process (S27) after executing the process of 110SG303 of the setting value conversion process), and the end of the setting permission state is specified. It is possible to transmit control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) to
The performance control means stores the setting specific value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the processing of 110SG313 of the set value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45 part to be executed), and it is possible to execute an effect according to the setting value specified from the setting specific value (for example, until 1 hour has passed since the pachinko game machine 1 was turned on, or 100 times The part that executes the background effect (set value suggestion effect) until the variable display is executed), based on receiving the control information that specifies the end of the setting permission state transmitted from the game control means, Special control is performed according to the end of the setting permission state (for example, as shown in FIG. Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image to the effect that the change of the set value is completed) on the image display device 5. ),
The game information includes pending memory information relating to variable display that has not yet started (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
When a new setting value is set in the setting permission state, the game information including the pending storage information is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 8, when a new setting value is set, A portion where data (data stored after address F001) excluding the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is cleared by the CPU 103 executing the RAM clear process),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value stored in the effect control means from being tampered with, and the player may be inconvenienced by changing the setting value while the pending storage is being stored. Appropriate profit can be prevented, and special control can recognize that the setting permission state in which setting values can be set has ended.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in an advance notice production|presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table for losing. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board. It is the figure which showed the RAM area|region corresponding to the storage area of main board|substrate RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of the display monitor; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer; It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a 1st start prize-winning effect and a 2nd start prize-winning effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect during a variable display. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect during a variable display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a mode of presentation during variable display in Modification 1; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect during variable display in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect during variable display in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing in modification 3; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in Modification 4, and (B) is an explanatory diagram explaining a change in the display content of the display monitor in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a security cover in modification 5; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in Modification 5; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a security cover in modification 6; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in Modification 6; It is an explanatory diagram showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modification 7. FIG. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value conversion processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a method of converting a set value into a set secret value; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value update processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of the first-in-the-morning background effect (set value suggesting effect); It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table for losing. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing setting value confirmation processing; (A) is a flow chart showing RAM-level processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a part of timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing setting change processing in Modification 8. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing in modification 8. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 8; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 9; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in modification 10;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, ready-to-win effects such as normal reach and super-to-win A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is also referred to as a suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (jackpot reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach < super reach E < super reach D < super reach C < super reach B, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. <It becomes higher in the order of super reach A.> In addition, you may provide the reach which confirms that it will become a big hit.

In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. Further, during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, there is a case where a developing effect to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach is executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops to super reach, which is one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops by two levels or more is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is announced at a predetermined timing after establishment of the reach. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, for the super reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super reach, the title of the reach is notified only by display, and for the other super reach, the title is notified by display and sound. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices for reach with a high degree of reliability than for reach with a low degree of reliability. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation, thereby improving the performance effect. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or not depending on the reliability. Also, even in the same ready-to-win effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (linear script, square script, etc.) of title characters may be changed according to the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of an effect operation in this embodiment will be described. The following production operations are executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the "left" and "right" stops and the ready-to-win state is entered. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory portion of the ready-to-reach effect (also referred to as super ready-to-win effect) ends, the entire screen of the image display device 5 appears as shown in FIG. 9(D). , the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the Reach title name (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , Super Reach A are announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. The subsequent part of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A is executed. A production in which characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if an ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the lines are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super ready-to-win effect, a sound corresponding to the lines may be output from the speaker 8 . In addition, the words are not limited to being displayed in balloons as shown in FIG.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. , characters of "SP reach B") are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of super reach B. be. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. The subsequent part of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is executed.

In this way, in super ready-to-win A and super ready-to-win B, the title of ready-to-win is reported when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Also, in Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until the notification is given, the super ready-to-win effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach will be achieved after the start of the super reach effect and which title will be announced. In super reach A and super reach B, it is not limited to making the production mode until the title is announced completely common, but at least one You may make it make the part into a common production mode. For example, in the introductory portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a Super Reach production (for example, a production that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified after that. can be By doing so, the performance effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the performance. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach is to be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the characters "SP reach D") is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is announced by outputting a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach from the speaker 8 (here, "Kill the enemy"). In this way, in super reach D, the title is announced at the start of the super reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the level of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9(H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation for a big hit, but it does not have to be completely consistent with the degree of reliability of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D is not to notify the title name as it is, but to notify the contents of Reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of title notification by sound is varied depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach performance. In addition, FIG. 9(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9(J), character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, dialogue 31AK004 of character 31AK001 is displayed, and a super reach D reach effect is executed in which character 31AK001 and character 31AK009 confront each other. be.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the characters "SP reach E") is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. In addition, along with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is performed. executed. In this way, in Super Ready-to-Wear E, titles are announced together with the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In super reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach effect.

In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win E with low reliability of big hit, the title is notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is announced (Fig. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing so, the title notification can be executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach even in the super reach performance such as the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the progress of the ready-to-win performance may be stopped and the title may be announced.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in super ready-to-reach A and super ready-to-reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and in super ready-to-win D and super ready-to-e E, the super ready-to-win effect is announced. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of super reach performance, and super reach D and super reach D with low reliability of big hit are announced. In E, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low reliability of big hit, super. The title may be announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win effect.

(title display area)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in super reach D and super reach E, the image display device 5 A title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen of . By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, when the hit reliability is high, title notification is performed in a wider display area than when the reliability is low, so effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title may be displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach A and super reach B, and the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach D and super reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for title notification according to the ready-to-win effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the hit reliability is high, the title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than when the reliability is low. Further, when the display area for title notification is changed according to the ready-to-win effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display location may be changed.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the title announcement in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, super reach D with lower reliability of big hit than super reach A and super reach B is displayed without displaying expectation indication. In the title notification in , the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming repetitive. In addition, in the title announcement in the super reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than the super reach D, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his sense of expectation due to the display of the expectation suggesting display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with the low reliability. At least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E may display the expectation level suggestion display.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the indication indicating the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars. You may make it display the numerical value which carried out. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half of the black stars may be displayed to increase the number of levels of expectations.

(Title display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Also, in super reach D and super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a final effect, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach performance. Further, by doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because the effect can be improved at any time.

In addition, although the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification and expectation suggestive display according to the reliability of the big hit may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each ready-to-win performance is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (final stage of the variable display), a decision performance for informing whether or not the display result will be a ``jackpot'' is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), an effect is executed in which an image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 . After that, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A fixed decoration pattern is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the friendly character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the ready-to-win effect, the title notification is finished before the final effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decided effect, and to perform a well-balanced title notification.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 to execute variable display, but during the ready-to-win production. The display of the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decoration pattern may not be displayed during the ready-to-win effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when displaying characters permanently displayed during pending display, active display, variable display, and display related to cellphone interlocking on the image display device 5, they are not displayed appropriately during the ready-to-win effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect. may be At that time, during low-reliability ready-to-win effects such as super ready-to-win E, these displays may remain displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the low-reliability ready-to-win effect, and to make the player pay attention to the ready-to-win effect in the highly-reliable ready-to-win effect.

(development production)
Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the ready-to-reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), as shown in FIG. As shown, the ready-to-win effect is interrupted and an effect is executed in which the screen is torn. After that, when it develops to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11(C), the title of super reach A is announced, and the reach performance of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11(D), the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the destination reach is a reach in which title notification is performed by display and sound, the title notification is performed again by display and sound.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11(B), and it may be a effect such that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display of malfunction) is displayed. You may do so. By setting it as such production|presentation, an unexpected production|presentation can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a fake development production such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion performance)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9(H), the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the degree of expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and gradually You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production|presentation which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation suggestive display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. A production that fits in one of the white stars is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, tone quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). At the stage where the number of black stars corresponding to the level of expectation fits in the level of expectation suggestive display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 12(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level suggesting effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is raised one step at a time, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation rises by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the expectation level by half. In this case, different sounds or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars displayed (the number of levels of rising expectations). For example, the same sound may be output when half black stars are displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Moreover, there may be a case where the sound is not output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggesting effects are diversified, and the effects of the effects are improved. In addition, the same black star image will be displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectations that increase at once, and the black stars will increase according to the number of stages of expectations that will increase. You may make it perform the production|presentation which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each production mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, etc. may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIGS. 12G to 12L show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the degree-of-expectation effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggesting effects are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the ready-to-reach performance based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-reach D is the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach D2 that is different from the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach D is designated, title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12(G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of READY is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from that in the normal mode (for example, a sound with a different tone) is output. Also, the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 in super reach D2 is not star-shaped but diamond-shaped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The effect is executed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, a sound "pong" is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At the stage where the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the expectation suggestive display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted in such a manner that they shine, as shown in FIG. 12(L). In this way, by varying the notification mode of the title according to the effect mode (state when the ready-to-win effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified and the effect is enhanced. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach D variation pattern is specified, but depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), other reach effect ) may be made to have different presentation modes. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the ready-to-win effect is executed), whether or not to report the title of ready-to-win, and the execution ratio of the title to be reported may be varied. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the title of ready-to-win may not be announced. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation level is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level suggestion effect is executed to gradually increase the number of black stars. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation level suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Another example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggesting effect in which the display indicating the degree of expectation of the expectation degree suggesting display is increased step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the degree of expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed all at once instead of step by step. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(A), the title Super Reach D is notified, and after completing the effect of increasing the number of black stars in stages, as shown in FIG. A development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. The title of Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestive display 31AK033 with three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 has moved, it is also possible to execute a development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestive display are changed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, a title advance notice for giving notice of the degree of reliability of a big hit is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14(A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach A is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title announcement is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. Thus, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not performed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is performed. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the title of Reach is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display of the title.

Further, when a title announcement is executed in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound corresponding to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Also, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance effect and the development effect, which increases the expectation of being controlled to the big hit advantage state. By doing so, once the title is announced, an effect that raises the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not to execute a title announcement) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super ready-to-win title is determined according to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "losing", for example, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A). As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title is "black", "red", one that changes from "black" to "red", and one that changes from "black" to "fruit pattern". , and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the title. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the presentation effect will be improved.

In addition, the "fruit pattern" may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. Also, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach that has a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of change timings may be provided and one of the change timings may be determined. In the case of super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than in super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, in the normal mode the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. Determines the display color of the title in different proportions. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by varying the manner of execution of the title announcement (display color and display color change timing) depending on the presentation mode, the presentation is diversified and the presentation effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the advance notice of the big hit reliability is executed according to the display mode of the character's words (for example, the display color of the words, etc.) in the ready-to-win effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of super ready-to-win, the display color of the character's words in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (whether or not to execute advance notice of the words) is decided (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect is determined, for example, by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(C). As shown in FIG. 16(C), the display colors of the words in the ready-to-win effect are "white", "red", and those that change from "white" to "red", in this order (ascending order). Reliability is high. That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the words. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the words, and the production effect will be improved. As for the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the reliability of the big win may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the same effect mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the reliability of the big win may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big win reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big win reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the special mode may determine the display color of the words at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, in place of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit may be executed by a change in the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the reliability of the big win differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the words in the ready-to-win effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not super-ready-to-win (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other advance notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the decision results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect decision processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the title notice and the dialogue notice in the case of super reach. and at least one of the speech announcement may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be changed according to the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of ready-to-win, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice differ in the number of executable rendering modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed). By doing so, the production is varied and the production effect is enhanced. The number of executable effects may be changed arbitrarily between the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, and the number and types of executable effects may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big win.

(Effect production)
When the effect mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode will change may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect effect in which the image affects at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. After the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or lines may be changed. The effect mode of effect effect (effect effect image, etc.) may be common to both the title and the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or lines does not change even though the action effect is executed. When the action effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the effect effect, the execution timing, and the mode of effect may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, depending on the presentation mode of the action presentation, the rate at which the presentation mode of at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the action presentation) may be different. It is possible to make the ratio of the dialogue notice and the change of which production mode (the ratio of which effect is applied) different, or the ratio of what color (how many stages) the change is made to be. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title or the words will be affected when the action effect image is displayed, thereby improving the effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of production modes, whether or not to execute the action production and the production mode may be determined at different ratios according to the production modes. By doing so, it is possible to execute an action effect corresponding to the effect mode, and the effect of the effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is selected according to the effect content of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the action of the character, the effect content in the battle effect, etc.). may change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the contents of the ready-to-win effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5 , a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 . Although expressed as a sub-liquid crystal here, the sub-display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot-matrix LED. The sub-liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. The sub-liquid crystal executes various effects such as a notice effect and display of a pending display. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub-liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the title notification as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. In this case, after announcing the title on the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. By doing so, the title and the expectation level suggesting display can be displayed without interfering with the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation level suggesting display become easy to understand.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of the title of the ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect has been described. may For example, as a preview effect (for example, a pre-read preview effect), when executing a pre-read zone effect that shifts to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) with different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5, the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission ("reach with 7", "annihilate the enemy with a stick controller", etc.) and executing a mission effect that gives the player an advantage when the mission is accomplished, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when the timing for deriving the display result comes, a decided effect is executed to notify whether or not the display result will be a "big hit", and then the display result is shown ( 10(B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and if a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super ready-to-win effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 enters the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C)-(F) and 18(G)-(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed in which the characters 31AK041 and 31AK042 face each other.

Along with the ready-to-win effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17(C). As a result, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images are prepared to indicate that an operation effect is to be executed. The reliability of the big win differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect will be executed during the ready-to-win effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. change to

After that, as shown in FIG. 18H, a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, an action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. It should be noted that the operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the control line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. , a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Also, at this time, the operation valid period during which the operation to the stick controller 31A is valid.

Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. Note that if no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The reliability of the jackpot is high. Even when an operation performance image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation performance image with high reliability during ready-to-win performance, so that the performance effect is improved and the expectation of the player is increased. can be maintained.

17 and 18, the notification of the title of reach and the display of the degree of expectation are omitted. may be executed. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestive display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestive display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the start of the variable display. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win effect, an effect to display a ready-to-win title indicating the development destination of the ready-to-win effect is executed. A specific image may be included and displayed when either the shutter display or the reach title display is displayed. The ready-to-win title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

A specific image is an image with a high degree of reliability of a big hit that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image as element E1, a melon image as element E2, an apple image as element E3, a watermelon image as element E4, and a strawberry image as element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Also, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit within the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter performance is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the ready-to-win title is displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. It should be noted that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as the image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the ready-to-win title effect are executed. For example, white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in order of the degree of reliability of the big hit (for example, a red shutter or a reach title with red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big win.

When performing the shutter display and the ready-to-win title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light to notify. The common sound and light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for fruit patterns is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the common sound and the specific sound may be partially overlapped in their output periods.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. The shutter image 31AK061 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19(b), variable display of decorative patterns is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 19(c), the reach state is entered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19(d), the super ready-to-win effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as a reach title display. The ready-to-win title image 31AK062 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Also, in the ready-to-win title image 31AK062, characters of "battle ready-to-win" are displayed to indicate that a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a battle effect is to be executed.

Further, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. Furthermore, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "Hot", which indicates that the reliability of the big win is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestive display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in the ready-to-win title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the common sound and the specific sound have been explained in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, a battle ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 19(e). An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" are displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production ends, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number patterns. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 forming the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the ready-to-win title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high degree of reliability for big wins has been displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d). Therefore, attention can be paid to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d) are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination of the shutter effect (whether or not to use the shutter effect and the mode of effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In this case, the shutter performance may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination relating to the ready-to-win title effect may also be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

(Description of characteristic parts of the present embodiment)
Next, features of this embodiment will be described. An embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 20-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 109SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine that supports and fixes the game board 2. It is composed of a frame (underframe) 3. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 109SG003, a glass door frame 109SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 109SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 109SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 109SG003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 109SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, the main board 11 has a lock switch 109SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, in the setting change state. A setting switch 109SG052 functioning as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting-switching switch 109SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 109SG201 together with the main substrate 11. The lock switch 109SG051 and the setting-switching switch 109SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 109SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 109SG201.

Since the board case 109SG201 having the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG52 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 109SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 109SG051 is also a switch that can execute a switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by means of a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 109SG029 and a display changeover switch 109SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 109SG029 are arranged on the substrate case 109SG201. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 109SG201. That is, the display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 109SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4, at the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the right side of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided. A security cover 109SG500A is attached to cover the part from the rear side. The security cover 109SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 109SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 109SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 109SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 109SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 109SG201. Security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 109SG001a via the front end of short piece 109SG500Aa.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-3, the long piece 109SG500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 109SG201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 become inoperable by the long piece 109SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is open, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 move together with the game machine frame 109SG003 to move from the long piece 109SG500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 109SG500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 109SG500A is canceled, and the operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 109SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Unless the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened by a store clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An unauthorized member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted from between a game device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko game machine 1 and a lock switch 109SG051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be operated to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 109SG052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, even in the regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed and the security cover 109SG500A covers the right side of the back of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, the board can be seen through the transparent security cover 109SG500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 109SG201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 20-1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc., and each of them is identified by a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information). A certain special design (also referred to as "special design") is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". do. In addition, the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Instead, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LEDs may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

A plurality of types of special symbols are attached with corresponding symbol numbers. As an example, the numbers "0" to "9" are assigned symbol numbers "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number "10". All you have to do is Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type can be different. Also, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99". . In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have been exemplified in a square shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device 4B is not limited to this. Each segment constituting the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be arranged irregularly.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, three In the decorative design display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions, decorative patterns (also referred to as production patterns), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified respectively, are variably displayed.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, Variation (for example, vertical scroll display) of the decorative design is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. After that, when the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the determined decorative pattern (final stop pattern), which is the variable display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the variation display using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, or the variation display using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronism with , variable display of a plurality of identifiable decorative patterns is performed, and a determined decorative pattern resulting from the variable display is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Incidentally, deriving and displaying various display patterns, such as special patterns and decorative patterns, means stopping display (also called complete stop display or final stop display) of identification information such as decorative patterns to terminate the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the derivation display of the determined decorative symbols as the result of the variable display, the variable speed of the decorative symbols becomes "0". The pattern may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that slightly shakes or expands or contracts. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, the player can recognize that the scroll display and update display are not progressing the variation of the decoration pattern. becomes. Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern completely stopped for a period of time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

For example, the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include nine types of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "9" or Chinese characters). Numbers, English letters, 9 character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters or symbols and character images may be used. , symbols such as letters, or other arbitrary graphics). A corresponding design number is assigned to each of the decorative designs. For example, symbol numbers "1" to "9" are attached to alphanumeric characters "1" to "9", respectively. Incidentally, the number of decoration patterns is not limited to 9, but may be any number (e.g., 8, 10, etc.) as long as an appropriate number of combinations, such as a winning combination or a losing combination, can be formed.

After the variable display of decorative patterns is started, until the fixed decorative patterns that result in the variable display are derived and displayed, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are displayed. , for example, a scroll display is performed such that the pattern numbers are sequentially flowed from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest. , the decorative pattern with the smallest pattern number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative design display area 5L), the design is displayed by scrolling from the larger design number to the smaller design number. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 109SG005U are arranged. An active display area 109SG005F is displayed that displays the pending display corresponding to the memory as an active display. Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) based on starting winnings by That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols has been established, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed, and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, etc., when the starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is held. The pending display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D is the pending display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole, and the pending display in the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. is a pending display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In particular, the first pending storage display area 109SG005D of the present embodiment has a pending 1 display position that displays the first first special figure pending display from the bottom to the top, and the second first special figure pending display. The hold 2 display position to be displayed, the hold 3 display position to display the third 1st special figure hold display, the hold 4 display position to display the fourth 1st special figure hold display are arranged in parallel, each hold Display is enabled.

A character image 109SGC is displayed above the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D on the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 20-27). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, when a new start winning occurs, the pending display moves from the character image 109SGC toward the first pending storage display area 109SG005D or the active display area 109SG005F. It is possible to execute the starting prize-winning effect.

In this embodiment, the suspension display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is displayed in round white (the suspension displayed in the first suspension storage display area 109SG005D storage display), and the suspension display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is a round white display (suspension memory displayed in the second suspension memory display area 109SG005U display). In addition, based on the hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The display modes of the generated hold display and , may be different display modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-1, along with the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U, at the top of the first special design display device 4A and the second special design display device 4B, the number of special design reservation storage are provided with a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B for identifiably displaying. The first reservation display 25A displays the number of first special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable. The second reservation display 25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable. The number of first special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The number of second special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is also called the total number of reserved memories. When simply referring to the "special figure reserved memory number", it usually refers to the concept including both the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number, but in particular, some of these (for example A concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total number of reserved memory).

General winning openings 109SG050A and 109SG050D are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, and general winning openings 109SG050B and 109SG050C are provided below the general winning opening 109SG050A. Further, below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal open state (see the solid line position in FIG. 20-1) and the tilted position (see the solid line position in FIG. Equipped with a normal electric accessory having a movable wing piece that changes to an enlarged open state (see dotted line position), and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 109SG081 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing is in a vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second start winning opening. It will be in a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 109SG081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning hole by tilting control in which the movable wing is in the tilting position. ) is in an enlarged open state. In the variable winning ball device 6B, even when in the normal open state, game balls can enter the second start winning port, but the possibility of game balls entering is lower than in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be Alternatively, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normal open state, for example. In this way, the second starting winning port as the second starting area has an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and a normal open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). change to

A game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 20-2, for example. A game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2, for example. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4"), the first starting condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure pending storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4"), then the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B. may be the same number as each other, or may be different numbers.

In addition, the game balls that have passed (entered) the general winning openings 109SG050A, 109SG050B, 109SG050C, and 109SG050D are shown in FIG. 109SG026C and the fourth general prize winning port switch 109SG026D, and based on the detection, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 will be described. In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front are used as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 20-1, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 has a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A on the left side and a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B on the right side. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. Inside 109SG007, in particular, game balls flowing down inside the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B can be visually recognized.

The first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A is equipped with a first big winning gate door 109SG701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 109SG082 (see FIG. 20-2). A changing first big prize opening is formed. The first big winning hole is formed to open upward on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. In addition, the first big prize winning opening door 109SG701 can be slid forward and backward between a closing position for closing the first big winning opening and an open position for opening the first big winning opening by driving the solenoid 109SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the ON state, the first big winning gate door 109SG701 opens the first big winning gate, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first big winning gate. make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the OFF state, the first large winning opening door 109SG701 closes the first large winning opening so that the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first big winning hole changes between an open state that is advantageous for the player through which game balls can easily pass (enter) and a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player because game balls cannot pass through (enter). Instead of the closed state in which the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port is provided. may

The game ball that has passed through (entered) the first big prize hole passes through the first count switch 109SG023 (see FIG. 20-2) provided in the first big prize hole, and is detected by the first count switch 109SG023. be done. A game ball that has passed through the first count switch 109SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Based on the game balls being detected by the first count switch 109SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the first large winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning ball device 109SG007A opens the first big winning hole, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first special winning ball device 109SG007A closes the first big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the first big winning hole. , resulting in a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that do not enter the first big winning hole are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstruction nail or the like (not shown), and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded and opened state, the second starting is performed. It is designed to win the prize.

The second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B shown in FIG. 20-14 is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and is driven to open and close by a solenoid 109SG083 (see FIG. 20-2). A second large winning opening door 109SG711 that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second large winning opening door 109SG711. The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. The second large prize winning port door 109SG711 operates between a first state (open state) in which the second large prize winning port is opened by driving the solenoid 109SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second large prize winning port is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is in the ON state, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 opens the second large winning opening, and the game ball moves to the second Make it easier to pass through (enter) the second prize-winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 closes the second large winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second large winning opening. (enter) to make it impossible. In this way, the second big winning hole changes between an open state in which game balls can easily pass (enter) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. Instead of the closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) the second large prize-winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the second large prize-winning port is provided. may

A game ball passing through (entering) the second big winning hole is detected by the second counting switch 109SG024A by passing through the second counting switch 109SG024A installed in the second big winning hole shown in FIG. be done. Based on the game balls being detected by the second count switch 109SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second special winning ball device 109SG007B opens the second big winning hole, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning ball device 109SG007B closes the second big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the second big winning hole. , resulting in a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 20-14, inside the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, there is formed a game ball flow path 109SG750 through which game balls that have passed through the second big winning hole can flow down. The game ball flow path 109SG750 includes a main path 109SG740 (area along the solid line in FIGS. 14 area along the dotted line). A backflow prevention member 109SG730, which will be described later, is provided between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741. Further, upstream of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740, there is provided a first branch portion 109SG742 where the branch path 109SG741 branches from the main path 109SG740, and downstream of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740. , a second branch portion 109SG743 where the branch path 109SG741 branches off from the main path 109SG740. That is, the game ball flowing down the main path 109SG740 can move from the first branch portion 109SG742 or the second branch portion 109SG743 to the branch path 109SG741 side.

At the most downstream part of the main path 109SG740, a third count switch 109SG024B through which the game ball can pass is installed, and the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B. detected. A game ball that has passed through the third count switch 109SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Also, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branch path 109SG741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 109SG024C. , is detected by the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

In addition, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B during the small winning game described later, the game state after the small winning game is finished is controlled to the big winning game state. there is Therefore, during the period in which the second big winning gate door 109SG711 is open during the small winning game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like, and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B. In such a case, the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, because the game is controlled to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

Downstream of the first branch portion 109SG742 in the main path 109SG740, there is provided a regulation member 109SG721 that regulates and permits the game ball to flow down toward the third count switch 109SG024B. The regulating member 109SG721 projects into the main path 109SG740 by driving the solenoid 109SG085 (see FIG. 20-2), thereby regulating the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B on the main path 109SG740. and an allowable state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the third count switch 109SG024B on the main path 109SG740 by retracting from the main path 109SG740, and is slidably provided in the front-rear direction.

The upper portion of the regulating member 109SG721 is formed as a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 109SG740 so as to form a downward inclination of a predetermined angle toward the branch path 109SG741 when viewed from the front. . Therefore, when the game ball flows down the main path 109SG740 when the regulation member 109SG721 is in the regulation state, the game ball travels along the flat surface formed on the upper part of the regulation member 109SG721 and passes the second branch portion 109SG743. It is guided to flow down toward the fork 109SG741 via.

Between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741, a backflow prevention member 109SG730 is rotatably supported by a pivot shaft facing in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 109SG730 consists of a plate-shaped member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when the game ball guided by the flat surface of the regulation member 109SG721 contacts from the main path 109SG740 side, the branch path from the main path 109SG740 side. It can be moved (rotated) so that it can pass to the 109SG741 side. Specifically, it is rotatable between an allowable position inclined to open the space between the main route 109SG740 and the branch route 109SG741 and a restricted position closing the space between the main route 109SG740 and the branch route 109SG741. is provided. A rib 109SG801 projecting forward is provided above the regulating member 109SG721, and the backflow prevention member 109SG730 abuts against the rib 109SG801 in the regulating position from the counterclockwise direction in a front view.

In addition, the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is usually placed at the regulated position by its own weight, and at the regulated position, the game ball guided on the flat surface contacts from the main path 109SG740 side (right side in front view). , is pushed by the game ball and rotates clockwise in a front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

At this time, the vertical width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 109SG743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 109SG024B Movement of the game ball from the 109SG740 side to the branch path 109SG741 side provided with the fourth count switch 109SG024C is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is in the regulating position, even if the game ball comes into contact with the branch path 109SG741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is in contact with the rib 109SG801 to prevent backflow. The rotation of the member 109SG730 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip portion of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 109SG743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball, so the fourth count switch 109SG024C is provided. Movement of the game ball from the side of the branch path 109SG741 to the side of the main path 109SG740 provided with the third count switch 109SG024B is surely regulated.

Returning to FIG. 20-1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 20-1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, is composed of 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs, etc., and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. The normal pattern (also referred to as "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display).

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. 25 C of normal-pattern holding|maintenance indicators are comprised including four LED, for example, and display the number of normal-pattern holding|maintenance memory|storage as an effective passing ball number which passed the passage gate 109SG041. The passage gate 109SG041 is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. A gate switch 21, which will be described later, is built in the passage gate 109SG041.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Also, a winning opening other than the winning openings described above may be provided. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 109SG003, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, there is provided a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball-hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the driving of the firing motor of the ball-hitting device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided. At the bottom of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, there is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加A stick controller 31A is attached to the lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) or the like. ing. The upper plate member forming the upper plate has, for example, a push button 31B at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like. is provided.

In the present embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area and a right game area on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged substantially in the center of the game area. A game ball hit weakly (left-handed) by the hitting ball operation handle flows down the first path (left game area), and a game ball hit hard (right-handed) by the hitting ball operation handle flows down the second path ( right game area).

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the first path can win the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball that has flowed down the second path can be the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B are capable of winning prizes, and a large number of obstacle nails are arranged so as to be able to pass through the passage gate 109SG041. In other words, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B cannot win and cannot pass through the passage gate 109SG041.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko game machine 1, the normal symbol display device 20 normally displays a variable display of symbols such that a game ball passing through a passage gate 109SG041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 20-2. After the normal pattern start condition for execution is satisfied, for example, the normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied, such as the end of the previous normal pattern fluctuation display. Variation display of the normal pattern by the pattern display 20 is started.

In this normal pattern fluctuation display, after the normal pattern fluctuation is started, when a predetermined time as a normal pattern fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal pattern that is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) such as a number indicating "7", for example, is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the fluctuation display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit", expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed so that the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B are placed at the tilting position. , normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 20-2, For example, when the previous special symbol game or the jackpot game state has ended, the first special symbol display device 4A starts the variable display of the special symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition. In addition, the second starting condition is established by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 20-2. After that, for example, based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the end of the previous variable display of the special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. .

In the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbols is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. Determined special symbols (results of variable display) are derived and displayed as variable display results. At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special pattern (small-hit pattern) different from the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "minor win" as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it will be "lost".

After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. be. After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, as an example, the special symbols representing the numbers ``3'', ``5'' and ``7'' are used as the big win symbols, and the special symbols indicating the number ``2'' are used as the small winning symbols. , The special pattern showing the sign of "-" is the lost pattern. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, and a losing symbol in the variation display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variation display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B. You may make it become a design, and it may be made for a common special design to become a jackpot design, a small hit design, and a losing design in the fluctuation display of both special designs.

After the big win pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed special pattern in the variable display of the special symbols and becomes "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big win game state, the first big winning entrance door of the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A. 109SG701 opens the first big winning hole until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are produced. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big winning slot, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15", "10", or "5"). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, the execution of the round is terminated by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win the first prize winning opening). good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of special symbols and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning game state, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B The 2nd prize winning opening door 109SG711 opens the second prize winning opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10) are generated. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B enters the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is set to open once in the small winning game state until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. , and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole passes through the third count switch 109SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B. It becomes a "jackpot" based on (V prize jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the third count switch 109SG024B. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole in the small winning game state passes through the fourth count switch 109SG024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, it does not become a "big win". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B, the second special winning ball device 109SG007B second big winning opening door 109SG711 is closed for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second big winning hole is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize hole, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second big winning hole, etc.) good.

It should be noted that after the end of the jackpot game state in the present embodiment, time-saving control (time-saving control) is performed in a predetermined variation frequency range (for example, 100 times or 20 times) and time-saving control is performed. Not in normal state and either controlled. By performing the time saving control, the variation display time (special figure variation time) in the variation display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on) is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, the variation display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit game state, and the variation display result becomes "big hit", in the small hit game state The game may be terminated when one of the conditions of passing the game ball through the third count switch 109SG024B is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, control to shorten the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B than in the normal state, normal Control to shorten the fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display of the normal pattern by the symbol display device 20 than in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of the normal pattern each time is "per normal pattern" Control to improve the probability of becoming more than in the normal state, tilting control time for tilting control of the movable wing pieces in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the result of the variable display being "normal hit" in the normal state To make it easier for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening and increase the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied, such as control to make the time longer than that in the normal state and control to increase the number of times of tilting more than in the normal state. , control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged open state is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. , the time until the next variation display result becomes a "big win" or "minor win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control is executable is also called the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-2, there are various is equipped with a control board. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a random number setting function used in a special game, a function to input signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of a production control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main substrate 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, the main board 11, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15 (A), is provided with a display monitor 109SG029 visible from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the display monitor 109SG029 , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 109SG030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 109SG029, and information displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 109SG030.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-2, the main board 11 includes a door opening sensor 109SG090 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 109SG003a that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable, and the opening of the first big winning entrance door 109SG701. Various sensors such as the first big prize winning gate sensor 109SG091 for detecting the opening of the second big prize winning gate door 109SG092 and the second big prize winning gate door sensor 109SG092 for detecting the opening of the second big prize winning gate door 109SG711 are connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signal output from the sensor.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. Switch circuit 110 to transmit to 100, output circuit 109SG111 to transmit the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 109SG081 ~ 83, information output for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 109SG016 Circuit 109SG112 is mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 20-2 is enclosed in a board case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-15(A). 11, a display monitor 109SG029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 109SG030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 109SG029. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display changeover switch 109SG030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening The number of game balls entering the mouth (hereinafter also referred to as "entry area") is totaled, and various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios based on the totals are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. By displaying these winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

The lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 109SG003 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened. Only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. In addition, since the lock switch 109SG051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 109SG051. In addition, the lock switch 109SG051 is a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 109SG070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 109SG070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG. 20-2.

The output circuit 109SG111 is also connected to the controller 109SG084 for driving the solenoid 109SG085. The controller 109SG084 receives an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 109SG111 when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, thereby starting drive control of the solenoid 109SG085. By driving the solenoid 109SG085 by the controller 109SG084, the regulating member 109SG721 repeats the regulating state and the allowing state every second regardless of the game state.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 20-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 20-5(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-5(A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big win" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C". The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small win B".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100 is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the game ball has passed the third count switch 109SG024B and that the third count switch 109SG024B has been turned on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 to the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the random number MR2 for judging the variation pattern Numerical data representing the numerical value MR3, the random number MR4 for judging the result of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 20-6, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 20-7 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and variation A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns It is Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variation display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of fluctuation pattern is determined first. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-7, a form is exemplified in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. When the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-ready-to-lose after being executed twice, a variation pattern that results in super-ready-to-lose by performing pseudo-continuous effect three times may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-8(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. Display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in -8 (C), big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), big hit type determination shown in FIG. In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. A judgment table (not shown), a normal pattern display result judgment table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big win or a small win (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, so that the winning probability of the big hit and the small hit (ball output rate) changes. It's becoming The setting value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, where 1 is the highest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage decreases stepwise.

FIGS. 20-8(A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbols are subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display When the set values are ``2'' and ``3'', the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/99) than when the set values are ``2'' and ``3''. Since the determination value is set as a judgment value, a small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the jackpot will be won with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and half of these judgment values Since the determination value corresponding to the small win is set, the small win is won with a higher probability (100/200) than when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" A set value is "1" because a big win is won with a lower probability (1/150) than a certain case, and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins. It is designed to win a small hit with a lower probability (1/99) than the case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/150), and half of these judgment values are By being set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the same probability as when the set value is "1". (100/200) to win a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 20-8 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set However, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set, and therefore, when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display, the set values are "1" and "2". A jackpot is won with a probability (1/200) lower than , but a small win is not won (winning probability: 0). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/200), and half of these judgment values are By being set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set values are ``1'' and ``2''. It is designed to win a small hit with the same probability (100/200) as in the case.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big win (big win A to big win C) with respect to the special symbol. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-8(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C), the probability of winning a small hit when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is all the same However, the set value 1, 2, and 3 may be arranged so that the odds of winning a small win become lower. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. In addition, the winning probability may be the same for all set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. A big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately, and the big-hit determination is made according to whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. A common table may be used, and the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit was not won, but some of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit correspond to the small hit It may be set as a judgment value so that a small hit is won. In other words, the fact that the ratio of the small-hit probability differs according to the set value includes that the small-hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

20-9 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 20-9 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 20-9 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning port (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed variable) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

FIG. 20-9 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small hit A or a small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the hit. This table is referenced to determine In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning D is executed. When the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game with the big winning E as the big winning type is executed. It is designed to be In other words, these big wins D and E are not the big win types determined by the random number MR2 for judging the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball during any of the small wins A and B. is a jackpot type determined by whether or not has passed through the third count switch 109SG024B.

Here, when explaining the jackpot types in the present embodiment with reference to FIG. , jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E for which time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is finished. That is, among these jackpots A to E, the jackpots C and E are the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and the jackpots A and D are the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Since the big win E is more advantageous than the big win D, the small win B is more advantageous than the small win A.

Of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state of the jackpot A ends.

The jackpot B is a jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the big win game state of the big win B, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 20 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 20 times.

The jackpot C is a jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win C, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until the big win occurs again before the special game is executed 100 times.

The jackpot D is a jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, the time saving control is not executed.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win E, the time saving control is executed until the special game is executed 100 times or until another big win occurs before the special game is executed 100 times.

In the big win D and the big win E, the big winning hole to be opened is the second big winning hole 109SG712, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be the first big prize opening. That is, for the big win D and the big win E, the second big winning hole 109SG712 is opened for the small winning game, and the second big winning hole 109SG712 is used as the big winning game based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small winning game. Instead, the first big prize opening should be opened.

In addition, in the time saving state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state due to the increase in the probability of becoming a "normal hit". Therefore, in the time-saving state, there are cases where a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and there are cases where a game ball wins V during a small win game, so a big win occurs, so the big win game state is normal. It becomes a so-called continuous state that tends to occur continuously without intervening the state.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, since the number of special games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 20 times, a small hit occurs during the 20 times of the special game, and the game is played. The rate at which the ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the game ball wins V during 20 special games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big win C and the big win E are finished, since the number of special games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, a small win occurs during the 100 special games. However, the rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the game ball wins V during 100 special games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. Also, four or less types may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 49 are assigned to the jackpot A, 50 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 149 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

Thus, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big win B or the big win C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big win game is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, 3. I'm trying to be

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 29 are assigned to the jackpot A, 30 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 69 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B, 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 199 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the big win A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big win B, 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

Thus, when a big hit occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big wins B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big win game is the big hit in the special game with the first special symbol. is higher than in the case of occurrence of .

That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), when the set value is 1, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit C The ratio is the highest, followed by the ratio of deciding on jackpot B, and the ratio of deciding on jackpot A is the lowest (jackpot type decision ratio at set value 1: jackpot C>jackpot B>jackpot A). Also, when the set value is 2, the percentage of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot B is the highest, followed by the percentage of determining the jackpot A is high, and the percentage of determining the jackpot C is the lowest (set value 2 jackpot type determination ratio: jackpot B>jackpot A>jackpot C). Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot A is the highest, followed by the percentage of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot B, and the percentage of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot C is the lowest. (jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: jackpot A>jackpot B>jackpot C).

In the present embodiment, according to the set value, the type of jackpot when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or a plurality of undetermined jackpot types among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C depending on the set value. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), in the small hit type determination table, when the setting value is "1", 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is small. It is assigned to the hit A, and 100 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. there is Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. there is

In this way, when the V winning big win occurs during the small winning game, the number of times of the special figure game in which the time saving control is executed after the big winning game is finished is 100 times, and the ratio of determining the big winning E is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D and lower in the order of set values 1, 2 and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), when the set value is 1, the minor hit B is higher than the minor hit A as the minor hit type. As a result, the ratio of determining the big win type as the big win E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small winning game is higher than the ratio of determining the big win D as the big win type (V at the set value 1) Jackpot type determination ratio by winning: Jackpot E>jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, the small win A and the small win B are determined at the same ratio as the small win types, so that a V prize is generated during the small win game. The ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot E are equal based on (the ratio of the jackpot type determination by the V prize at the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the small win A is determined as the small win type at a higher rate than the small win B, thereby generating a V prize during the small win game. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot D is higher than the ratio of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot E (the ratio of determining the jackpot type by V winning at the set value 1: jackpot D>jackpot E).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V winning occurs are different according to the set value. In other words, the kind of the small winning game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the kind of the big winning game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. , It is designed to improve the amusement interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the small hit type is different according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, Among the small hits A and B, there may be a small hit type that is not determined. That is, the determination ratio of the small hit type is different according to the set value that is set, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, regardless of whether the small hit type is determined using a common small hit type determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the small hit type may differ depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. In addition, when the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the fluctuation special figure, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the fluctuation special figure. In other words, to determine the small hit type at a different rate according to the fluctuation special figure, do not determine one of the small hit types (determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type Determining at a rate of 100% is also included.

In the present embodiment, the big hit type and the small hit type are determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the hit types may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of a big hit or a small hit increases, and the (e.g., a small hit B is easily determined), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIGS. Although a form in which the character itself does not change is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game character may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game is played based on the game ball passing through the third count switch 109SG024B during the jackpot game. While the game state after the end is controlled to the probability variable state, the rate of the game ball passing through the third count switch 109SG024B during the big hit game is different according to the variable special figure (so-called V probability variable type), and the pachinko game is played. When the setting value set in the machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and during high base (during time reduction control), the game ball is pushed to the third count switch 109SG024B. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on passing through. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch 109SG024B is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B, a predetermined effect is executed). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch 109SG024B is used as a game switch (the game state is changed to a probability variable state or a game state based on the game ball passing through the third count switch 109SG024B). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the variation pattern determination table includes a big hit variation pattern determination table that is used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result will be a "big hit", and a variation display result that will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a change pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "losing" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 20-11 (A) and 20-11 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 20-11 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the setting value is "1", 0 to Up to 300 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 350 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 351 to 825 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 400 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, , 0 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 150 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 151 to 450 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "3", 0 to 200 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is "1", "2", or "3", MR3 Of the range of judgment values 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to small hit variation patterns (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, The small hit variation pattern may be determined at different ratios from a plurality of variation patterns with set values "1", "2", and "3".

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and a low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the loss variation pattern determination table A, non-shortening non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-loss.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), in the change pattern determination table A for losing (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 400 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 450 of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the change pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the change pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), in the change pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 500 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), in the losing variation pattern determination table C (for low base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 900 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 500 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "3", out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), in the losing variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 500 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 550 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes lower in the order of 3. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α loss fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β loss, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the non-execution of the variable display by .

Note that the "common decision ratio" in this embodiment means that the decision ratio is completely the same with different setting values (this embodiment), and that the decision ratio is the same with different setting values. (For example, between setting value 1 to setting value 3, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach differs by about 1%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, the present invention It is not limited to this, and if the result of the variable display is a loss, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the variable patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same. Also, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern regardless of the set value is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss It may be the same regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the determination ratio of the super reach β loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern regardless of the set value is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value It may be the same regardless of the setting value in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach varies depending on the set value. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach loss has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss without shortening, and furthermore, the fluctuation pattern (PA1 -2) The variation pattern (PA1-3) of non-reach loss has a shorter variation time. Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach-losing variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally winning a starting prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored in pending memory, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, a non-reach-losing fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time and no reduction ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display is lengthened, and thus it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) to 20-12 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the total number of pending storage Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is retained A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of memories, and the number of pending memories of the second special symbol when performing the variation display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in each losing variation pattern determination table of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value from 1 to 3, the super reach losing variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) have the same range of random numbers. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variation display that is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) appearance rate) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In addition, in this embodiment, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of Super Reach Loss. However, considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss may be executed.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIGS. It is The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 20-13 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the result of the variation display, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 109SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 109SG041, and the general pattern display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

I / O 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 is an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various and an output port for transmitting signals.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the production control board 12 includes a production control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the production control CPU 120. , a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120. A random number circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing processing for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts. At this time, the performance control CPU120 fixed data reading operation to read the fixed data from the ROM121, the performance control CPU120 writes various variable data to the RAM122 and temporarily stores the variable data writing operation, the performance control CPU120 to the RAM122 Variation data reading operation to read various variation data temporarily stored, reception operation for receiving various signal inputs from the outside of the production control board 12 through the production control CPU 120 through the I / O 125, production control CPU 120 I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120 , ROM 121 , and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12 .

The production control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting sound effect signals as information signals indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring and the like for transmitting illumination signals as information signals indicating LED data are connected to the lamp control board 14 .

Also on the side of the effect control board 12, similarly to the main board 11, for example, random numbers (also called random numbers for effect) for determining the types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used, a display screen to be displayed when various errors (abnormalities) are reported, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, an error notification pattern such as an output sound, etc. are stored. there is The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The production control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, various production control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , It consists of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as variable display operation of decorative patterns, reach production, production display operation in re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations without variable display of decorative patterns. It is The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation to be the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

Among the special figure fluctuation time production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win production control patterns in which the production mode in each ready-to-win production is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win production may be included.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2 is provided with a production control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated in response to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, in the predetermined area of the production control buffer setting unit, the first special figure start winning buffer for holding display in the first holding storage display area 109SG005D, and the second holding storage display area 109SG005U A second special figure start winning buffer for displaying is set. In the first special figure start winning buffer, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") is provided, and the second special figure start winning buffer has a storage area (buffer number "1" to "4 ) is provided. It should be noted that the data of these starting winning buffers, the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, production control described later It is updated in the suspension effect processing (S72, see FIGS. 20-26) in the process processing, and based on the data of the starting winning buffer after the update, in the first suspension storage display area 109SG005D and the second suspension storage display area 109SG005U Pending display is updated.

Specifically, when the first start winning designation command is received based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, the reserved display in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is displayed in a round white color. While is newly added, when the first fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the fluctuation of the first special figure is newly started, the highest ( The holding display is updated so that the round white display of the holding memory that started winning first is erased, and the other round white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward direction). do. Similarly, when the second start winning designation command is received based on the start winning to the second start winning opening, the suspension display in the second suspension storage display area 109SG005U is newly replaced with a round white display. , when the second fluctuation start command is received based on the start of the second special figure fluctuation, the highest (first The holding display is updated so that the round white display of the holding memory that started winning the prize is erased and other round white displays are shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, leftward direction).

Here, the display of the total number of game balls, the ratio of the role items, etc. on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, there is information about the winning of the game, for example, the number of winning balls in the first start-up opening (navel), the number of winning balls in the second start-up opening (electric chew), and the first big prize. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls won by winning the mouth and the second big prize mouth (attacker) are input, the number of shot balls is counted, and the display monitor 109SG029 displays the first big prize mouth and the first prize ball out of the total number of prize balls. Consecutive ratio (%), which is the percentage of the number of prize balls won in the two main prize openings (attacker), the number of prize balls in the second start prize opening (electric chew) out of the total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls in the first The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from winning the big prize hole and the second big prize hole (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched It is designed to display. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls described below) to the total number of prize balls won in the first and second big prize openings (attackers). The role ratio is the number of prize balls from the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls from the 1st and 2nd grand prize mouths (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls acquired below). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls won in the 1st and 2nd big prize gates (attacker) and the number of prize balls won in the 2nd start prize gate (denchu). The number of prize balls and the number of prize balls won in prize openings other than the 1st and 2nd major prize openings (attacker) and 2nd starter prize openings (denchu) (1st starter prize opening, general prize opening) It is the sum of the number and In addition, the first big prize hole, the second big prize hole (attacker), and the second start prize hole (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the width of the game ball that can pass through changes, so that the game ball wins a prize. It is a role that the assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first big winning opening, second big winning opening (attacker), and second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the assumed winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed accessory.

As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, regarding the consecutive ratio and role ratio, the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (navel) and general winning opening (sode) in the number of 6000 winning balls (general number of prize balls), number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric prize balls) that is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize mouth (electric chew), first big prize mouth and second big prize mouth The number of special electric prize balls (attacker's prize balls), which is the number of prize balls awarded to (attacker), is counted. The total is regarded as one set, and the consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of normal electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls by winning the first start opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) to be tallied The number of prize balls (attacker's prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, which has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. there is In other words, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored, and the cumulative consecutive ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls hit with respect to the number of 60,000 prize balls is counted. The tally is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

The display monitor 109SG029 displays the consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%) for 6000 balls, the cumulative consecutive ratio (%), the role ratio (%), and the base ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60,000 winning balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but as the game progresses, the number of prize balls won by winning the first starting hole (navel) and winning the second starting winning hole (electric chew) are tallied. , the number of prize balls by winning the first big prize hole and the second big prize hole (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after 6000 consecutive ratios (%) are displayed is reflected in the 60000 consecutive ratios (%) displayed after that, 6000 consecutive ratios (%) will be displayed. There is a risk that a discrepancy will occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first starter (navel), the number of prizes by winning the second starter prize (electric chew), the number of prizes for the first big prize and the second big prize (attacker) By inputting the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls, and totaling is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the timing of displaying the consecutive ratio (%) for 6000 balls), such a discrepancy can be avoided. can be prevented.

It should be noted that the storage area for storing information relating to game winnings in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and includes general winning balls, first starter winning balls, normal electric winning balls, and special electric winning balls. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set values. Therefore, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls from winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (Denchu) and the number of prize balls to the 1st and 2nd grand prize mouths (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the number of winning balls is 42000, which is the sum of the number of winning balls in (1). In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total accumulated number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, the number of winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out as a result of the winning of game media by the attacker and the electric chew. Also, the number of consecutive winning balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning game media to the attacker. The total hit means the total number of game media hit into the pachinko game machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be calculated by the following formula (1). Also, the role ratio can be obtained by the following formula (2). Also, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).
Consecutive ratio = [number of balls acquired in succession / total number acquired] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(number of balls acquired in a row + number of balls acquired in a row) / total number acquired] x 100 (2)
Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hit] x 100 (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning ball is 42,000, the role ratio is obtained by dividing 42,000 by 60,000 to obtain 0.70 (rounded down to three decimal places). However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, the following method of calculation is required.

First, the first calculation method will be explained. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4,200,000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60000. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, to obtain the calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point, it is necessary to multiply by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be explained. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. This gives a quotient of 70. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result can be obtained up to two digits below the decimal point. Here, division by 1000 is sufficient to obtain a calculation result up to three digits below the decimal point.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the role product ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in a 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can only perform calculations between maximum 2-byte values. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1, 60h of the lower 1 byte is discarded from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h of the number of winning balls to calculate the number of winning balls as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In the third calculation method, while the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can easily perform calculations, an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are 10 times. In other words, as the period for calculating the role-product ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

Further, the board case 109SG201 is made of a translucent material so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 109SG029 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 109SG201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for releasing heat from the electrical components of the main substrate 11 . The display monitor 109SG029 provided on the main substrate 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is not obstructed by the heat dissipation holes. It should be noted that the term “right in front” here means a straight front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who is trying to visually recognize the main board 11 . Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1 can only perform calculations between maximum 2-byte values. Therefore, the lower 1 byte may be truncated for ease of calculation.

A third calculation method, which is a simplified version of the second calculation method, will now be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko game machine 1, 60h of the lower 1 byte is discarded from the total number of prize balls 00EA60h, and the total number of prize balls is reduced to 00EAh. Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is truncated from 00A410h of the number of winning balls to calculate the number of winning balls as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

Then, as in the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). 156 is then divided by 2 to obtain 78 as the quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the role product ratio is obtained as 78%.

In addition, a storage area for storing information on game wins (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total of information on game wins stored in 10 ring buffers with maximum 2-byte counters), prize balls The total number buffer) may continue to be stored without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further explained later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the memory area that stores information about the winning of the game, such as when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive winning balls is greater than the number of winning balls processing may be performed. Also, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while performing the error display or the warning display, or after performing the initialization process. Error display and warning display will be further described later.

Assuming that the total number of winning balls is 34,321 and the number of winning balls is 19,876, the role ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 19,876 by 34,321 as a divisor. 19876/34321=0.57912 . When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, so the following formulas are substituted. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is discarded, resulting in 19876/343=57.9475. Since the decimal point is rounded down, a role ratio (%) of 57% is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. There will be no

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 for values other than the most significant bit), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, which is an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by truncating the decimal point, for example, if the correct value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is 1 at 69% → 70%. Although it is conceivable that an error of 1% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the consecutive ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of 1% error.

Also, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so if the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Furthermore, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error exceeds 1% and may become even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, the role ratio (%) and consecutive ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls above a certain number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is totaled by the counter. Alternatively, the fact that the error may be large even if it is displayed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The display monitor 109SG029 displays the role ratio (%), the consecutive ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). displayed. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker. %), there is a risk that the value of the role ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive role (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the consecutive ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are displayed sequentially.

Also, if the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, if two 7 segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100%. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 109SG029 shown in FIG. 20-15(A), numeric values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numeric values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

In the present embodiment, a sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, the number of prize balls is counted individually. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of winning ball balls and the number of continuous winning ball balls may be counted based on the above.

Display of the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base will be described in more detail below. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided.

The RAM 102 on the main board 11 stores a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a big winning number counter are provided. In this embodiment, the number of winnings of the first and second big winning slots (attackers) is counted by the big winning number counter, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a first big winning number counter for tallying the number of winnings to the first big winning opening and a second big winning number counter for totaling the number of winnings to the second big winning opening are separately provided, The number of prizes won to the first big prize hole and the number of prizes won to the second big prize hole may be tallied separately, and these respective numbers of prizes won may be totaled to be the number of prizes won by the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21 . The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A. The second general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B. The third general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D. The big winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A.

A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main board 11 . The clear switch is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, data used for consecutive ratios and role ratios stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when there is no choice but to recalculate the continuous ratio or role ratio, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the consecutive ratio or role ratio. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for performing normal continuous ratio and role ratio calculations. Further, when the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the RTC 106 is provided on the main substrate 11, and the current time can be detected by the RTC 106. FIG. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, etc. by performing initial settings, and in this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the operating hours of the game arcade.

The main board 11 is housed in a board case 109SG201. A crimping pin (not shown) is attached to the substrate case 109SG201. By providing this crimping pin, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 109SG201, and tampering with the main board 11 is prevented. The board case 109SG201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter also referred to as "crimped board case").

Also, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided on the main board 11 . A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the substrate case 109SG201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. For example, the sealing seal is pasted over the detachable portion of the substrate case 109SG201. The sealing seal is arranged at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 109SG029. Thus, the display monitor 109SG029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing seal.

The display monitor 109SG029 includes a first display section 29A, a second display section 29B, a third display section 29C, a fourth display section 29D and a fifth display section 29E. Each of the first display portion 29A to the fifth display portion 29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 29A to fifth display section 29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, it is possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

The display monitor 109SG029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 20-15(B). The first display portion 29A of the first digit displays the aggregated set values (1 to 3), and the second display portion 29B of the second digit and the third display portion 29C of the third digit display the aggregation period. A numerical value is displayed in percentage in the fourth display portion 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E of the fifth digit. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big winning opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls won by winning the second start prize hole during the high base state and the number of prize balls by winning the big prize hole during the big win game state out of the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. "y7." is displayed on the display section 29B and the third display section 29C. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. "A7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (percentage display) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E.

When Base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." is displayed on the second display portion 29B and the third display portion 29C. "B6." is displayed on 29B and the third display portion 29C. Further, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E.

When calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, the main board 11 includes the first and second major winning openings (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. The number of game balls entering the fourth general prize winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge opening are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, and the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A to the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026A. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) of the prize winning port switch 109SG026D and the discharge port switch 109SG070.

In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A, the value of the big winning number counter is added. , When detection signals are output from the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, the first general winning opening counter, The values of the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 109SG070, the value of the hitting number counter is added. By doing so, the number of game balls entering each entry area (the number of winning game balls entering each winning hole) is counted. Note that the values of each counter are stored in the RAM 102 .

In this way, the step for tallying the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together with a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be tallied without executing a separate tallying program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of programs to be executed. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls into each winning hole based on the tallied number of winning balls into each winning hole, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning hole. Let The number of winning game balls is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one winning to a winning opening by the number of winning times to the winning opening. The number of winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning opening.

As shown in Figure 20-16, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is as shown in Figure 20-16. ), 1st start prize mouth prize ball (prize ball for winning the 1st start prize mouth (navel)), normal electric prize ball (prize ball for winning electric chew), special electric prize ball (to attacker It is the number of prize balls for winning prizes). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. Although the CPU 103 individually counts the number of game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of game balls winning the first start opening, the number of the game balls winning the general winning opening and the number of the first starting opening The number of game balls winning prizes may be aggregated. In addition, although the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately, the number of general prize balls and the number of first start prize balls are calculated separately. , and the number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer has 10 first to tenth storage areas each consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning hole for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning hole, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the number of prize balls (10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, the sum of the number of hits, and the total cumulative total for each winning hole. there is The 10 sets of total sum and total cumulative total storage area consist of a maximum 3-byte counter. I can remember.

In addition, the RAM 102 has a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and total cumulative ratios and consecutive ratios, a base (base 2) for 10 sets, and a base (base 1) for the previous 10 sets. and a base storage area for storing the The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role ratio and the consecutive ratio for the 10 sets and the total cumulative number of winning balls based on the winning number of the game balls into each winning opening for the 10 sets and the total cumulative total. and stored in a continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and continuous ratio. The continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the 10 sets and the cumulative total ratio and continuous ratio is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. If the role ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total total are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls to the winning numbers of the game balls into the winning openings for 10 sets, and calculates the base for the 10 sets (base 2) and the previous game. A base (base 1) calculated based on the number of hits of game balls into each winning hole for 10 sets (base 1) is stored in the base storage area. If base 1 and base 2 are stored as integers, for example, a maximum 1-byte counter can be stored with a margin.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 will be explained. FIG. 20-17 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 20-17, the address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are connected to the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number in this embodiment). 0000H to 2FBFH and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101 . In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area starts from 0000H.

The address/data signal lines of the built-in registers are assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in registers and transfers data to the registers via this register area. data is written.

The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or transfer data to the RAM 102. Write data. Other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are unused areas.

In addition, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, the 16 Kbyte area from 0000H to 2FFFH) includes a RAM control area, unused area, RAM data area and other areas, as shown in FIG. 20-18. consists of In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to this RAM control area, instruction data (opcodes) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the control program is stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (for example, various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

Data used to display the consecutive ratio and the role ratio are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of winning balls for each winning hole and a storage area for the total cumulative consecutive ratio role ratio. In addition, the storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas include an active buffer with a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer with a 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). minutes), and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data with different start addresses of subroutines.

In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the RAM area. , management data) is data of a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), it is divided into storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area and stored in units of 1 byte. is doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 109SG029 to display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main substrate 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-19(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the character ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 20-19(A), when the display on the display monitor 109SG029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed first. The short-term continuous ratio display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Short-term continuous ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed in the first display section 29A, and "y" is displayed in the second display section 29B. is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Short-term role ratios are displayed on the fourth display section 29D and the fifth display section 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display section 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display section 29E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. Display No. 3 of the total cumulative ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative consecutive ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Further, the total running ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the display No. 4 total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and the characters "7." are displayed on the third display portion 29C. Further, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the total cumulative role ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Also, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6). The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. A character is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display portion 29C. Also, the base 2 calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 29E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 2 to the base 2 of display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 109SG029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 every 5 seconds.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are shown in Figures 20-19(A) to 29-19(C) Based on the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030, when the set value is "1", the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2 are displayed, and the set value is "2". ", short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio when the setting value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display between the ratio, total cumulative role ratio, base 1, and base 2. It should be noted that if the display selector switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "1", the second The numerical value displayed on the first display section 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "2".

Further, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the second The numerical value displayed on the first display portion 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, and the total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the second The numerical value displayed on the first display section 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The ratio, base 1, and base 2 values are switched to the set value "1".

The display monitor 109SG029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. In 109SG029, it may be possible to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

Further, in the present embodiment, the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and these consecutive ratios, the role ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 109SG029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 109SG029 displays only the short-term consecutive ratio in red, and the short-term consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term winning ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, and total cumulative winning ratio.

Also, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage area for the total sum and total cumulative total for 10 sets, and the storage area for the continuous ratio/role ratio storage area for storing the role ratios and continuous ratios for the 10 sets and total cumulative total are updated.

Updates in the active buffer and ring buffer move the number stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Also, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the number of general prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87". Suppose that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th memory area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls in the 1st memory area to the 10th memory area is changed to "27", "81", and " 120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th memory area is set to "0" and the number of prize balls in the 10th memory area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the number of prize balls stored may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment will be explained. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-21, in the above-described game control main processing (see FIG. 3), after executing the initialization processing (step S8), the CPU 103 , it is determined whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11). If the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the door open sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12). If the door open sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 109SGSa13) is executed and the process proceeds to step 109SGSa14.

By executing the setting change process (step 109SGSa13), the CPU 103 accepts the operation of the setting changeover switch 109SG052 and the lock switch 109SG051, and enters a state in which the setting values can be changed. In addition, in the setting change process, it is possible to check the setting status of the setting value on the display of the display monitor 109SG029.

Then, after executing the setting change processing (step 109SGSa13), after executing step S7, if the lock switch 109SG051 is OFF (step 109SGSa11; No), if the door opening sensor 109SG090 is OFF (step 109SGSa12; No ) reads the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 109SGSa14, sets the read setting value as the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, and then executes the processing from step S10 onward.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change process, the CPU 103 sends a command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the set value set. may be output. Thus, when the CPU 103 is capable of outputting a command for notifying the set value set to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the newly set set value. Therefore, at a specific timing of the game (for example, during variable display, at the end of the big hit game, etc.), the setting value notification effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the setting value 1 confirmation notification effect, etc.) and pachinko It is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect or the like that suggests the set value of the gaming machine 1 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing to change the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the setting change process, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed, the effect control board 12 outputs that the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process. Since the CPU 120 can recognize it, the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 are being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is possible to notify the surroundings of something.

For example, during execution of the setting change process, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Settings are being changed" on a black background, and repeatedly outputs voices such as "Settings are being changed" from the speakers 8L and 8R. Other displays on the image display device 5 (for example, decorative patterns, small patterns, fourth pattern, right-handed display, etc.) may be prevented from being displayed, but these decorative patterns, small patterns, fourth pattern, right-handed display, etc. etc. may be displayed during execution of the setting change process. Furthermore, during execution of the setting change processing of the present embodiment, since the special symbol and normal symbol variable display are not executed, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of the setting change process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device At 20, a symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed, or a symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, failure) may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the setting change process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the pattern indicating that the setting change process is being executed in the normal symbol display device 20 , a pattern indicating a specific display result (for example, a failure) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 25A, the second holding display 25B, and the normal drawing holding display 25C may be made to emit light (for example, for repeating blinking) in a manner indicating that the setting change process is being executed. In addition, a display (round number display) for displaying the number of rounds during the jackpot game on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided for doing so, the display may be made to emit light in a manner indicating that the setting change process is being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the clear switch is on (S3; Y), when backup data is not stored (S4; N), or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), , determination of whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are ON (109SGSa11, 109SGSa12), and execution of setting change processing (109SGSa13), but the present invention is not limited to this. If the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or if the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the pachinko game machine 1 is in an abnormal state and the power is cut off, or the power is turned off in an abnormal state. Therefore, only when it is determined that the clear switch is on (S3; Y), it is determined whether or not the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are on (109SGSa11 , 109SGSa12) and setting change processing (109SGSa13) may be executed. That is, if the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or if the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be inherited.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing to change the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The CPU 103 may be able to execute a process (hereinafter referred to as a setting confirmation process) that allows confirmation of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the display monitor 109SG029, but in which the setting values cannot be changed. When the CPU 103 can execute the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the performance control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed. In this way, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed, the effect control board 12 outputs that the CPU 103 is executing the setting confirmation process. Since the CPU 120 can recognize it, the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 are being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is possible to notify the surroundings of something.

The setting confirmation process may be executed on condition that the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are turned ON after the CPU 103 executes the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 3). However, for example, during the variable display of the special symbols, during the jackpot game, during the small win game, when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed but there is a pending memory, a predetermined period after the error is detected, During the payout of prize balls, while waiting for game balls to enter the jackpot game start gate (only when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with the jackpot game start gate), the lock switch 109SG051 and the door The setting confirmation process may not be executed even if the open sensor 109SG090 is turned ON.

Furthermore, after the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process and displays the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 on the display monitor 109SG029, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 without switching the lock switch 109SG051 to OFF. The game may be enabled in a state where is set.

Next, the processing status of the setting change processing and the display mode of the display monitor 109SG029 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-22(A) and 20-22(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 109SG029 ends when the supply stops. If the big winning opening is open during the big winning game or the small winning game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the lock switch 109SG051 is turned ON. On the condition that the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON, the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029.

In the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 109SG052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22(E), the CPU 103 stores the setting value displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in the RAM 102 based on detection of the push-in operation of the lock switch 109SG051 by the game arcade clerk or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 notifies the store clerk or the like of the game arcade that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 by flashing the display monitor 109SG029. Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared.

In FIG. 20-22(E), as shown in characteristic part 2 of this embodiment (see FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46) described later, the CPU 103 stores the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. It may be converted into a set secret value, and a set value specifying command including the set secret value may be output to the effect control board 12 . Incidentally, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120), when receiving the setting value designation command from the CPU 103, by specifying and storing the setting value from the setting value designation command, the setting value that has been set A suggesting effect (set value suggesting effect) may be executed. Further, when the big winning hole is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-22(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the big winning hole is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 terminates the setting change process based on the fact that the lock switch 109SG051 is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like of the game hall, and the state in which the game is possible, that is, the change display result, the jackpot type, and the change pattern. A determination lottery, payout of prize balls, and the like become executable.

In addition, in the setting change processing in the present embodiment, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in the setting change process, the most advantageous setting value for the player ("1" in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow charts of FIGS. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 20-23 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power failure detection process (109SGS010). By executing a predetermined switch process, gate switch 21, first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, first count switch 109SG023, second count switch 109SG024A, and third The states of detection signals input from various switches such as the count switch 109SG024B, the fourth count switch 109SG024C, and the outlet switch 109SG070 are determined (109SGS011).

Subsequently, when a game ball wins in any of the general winning opening 109SG050A to general winning opening 109SG050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, and the second big winning opening 109SG712, That is, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, the first general winning switch 109SG026A, the second general winning switch 109SG026B, and the third general winning switch When detection signals are input from 109SG026C and the fourth general prize winning port switch 109SG026D, prize ball processing (109SGS012) for setting the number of prize balls corresponding to winning by each detection signal is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays the winning information (109SGS013) for calculating the winning information such as the role ratio, the consecutive ratio and the base, and displays the winning information such as the role ratio, the consecutive ratio and the base calculated by the winning information processing on the monitor 109SG029. Winning information display control processing (109SGS014) is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (109SGS015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, is output. (109SGS016).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side is executed (109SGS017). . After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (109SGS018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the display device 4B, set the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (109SGS019). CPU103, by executing the normal symbol process processing, controls the display operation of the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED), the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B Allows setting of tilting operation of one piece, etc.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit the control command from the main substrate 11 to the sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 12 (109SGS020). As an example of these, in the command control process, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155, among the output ports included in I / O105, After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time by setting the predetermined control data to the output port of the effect control INT signal. By setting the state to the OFF state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt permission state.

In addition, in the command control process of 109SGS020, a command for notifying the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended, etc. By including the information of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the existing command and transmitting it, the effect control board 12 may be periodically notified of the setting value. Furthermore, the production control board 12 (the production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11, and executes the production suggesting the set value at various timings such as during variable display and during the jackpot game. may

FIG. 20-24 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed at 109SGS018 shown in FIGS. 20-23 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment process (109SGS021). After executing the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of 109SGS022 to 109SGS031 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152.

In the starting winning process of 109SGS021, it is determined whether or not there is a first starting winning or a second starting winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B. Extract the random number MR1 for the use, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for judging the variation pattern, and in the case of the first start winning, the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A It is stored at the top, and when it is the second start winning, it is stored at the top of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B. In addition, in the starting winning process, when starting winning occurs, the setting for transmitting the first starting winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is also executed. In addition, the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (109SGS020).

The special symbol normal process of 109SGS022 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence or absence of suspension data stored in the first special symbol suspension storage unit 109SG151A and the second special symbol suspension storage unit 109SG151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by the display device 4B. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the display result determination table (see FIG. 20-8) corresponding to the set value and the random number MR1 for determining the variable display result, special symbols and decorative symbols It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of is to be a "jackpot" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol (jackpot symbol or Either a small hit pattern or a losing pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process of 109SGS023 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is set using numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether or not the variation display result is to be a "big hit". It includes processing to determine whether It should be noted that the variation pattern is determined using any of the variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal processing of 109SGS022 and the variation pattern setting processing of 109SGS023, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed special symbol, the special symbol, and the decorative symbol, which is the result of the variation display of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for judging the big hit type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern to determine the special symbol and the decorative symbol. It includes processing for determining the variable display mode.

The special symbol variation processing of 109SGS024 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, each time the special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is executed, the special figure variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153, is subtracted by 1 or added by 1, and the first Regardless of whether it is a special game using the first special figure in the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer elapses A time measurement is made. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation processing of 109SGS024 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using , it may be a process of controlling by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of 109SGS025 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special design stop processing, the first special design display device 4A and the second special design display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special design, and stop display (derivation) of the fixed special design as a result of the special design fluctuation display. It includes a process of setting to enable Then, whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is turned on is determined, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is turned on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". In addition, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

109SGS026 jackpot opening preprocessing is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this jackpot opening pre-processing, a setting is made to start the round in the jackpot game state and open the first jackpot, based on the fact that the result of the variable display is "big hit". etc. are included. At this time, the upper limit of the period in which the first big prize winning opening is kept open is set according to which one of the "big win A", "big win B", and "big win C" is the type of the big win, for example. good too. As an example, regardless of the jackpot type, the upper limit of the period in which the first big winning hole is open is set to "29 seconds", and the number of times the first big winning hole is opened, which is the upper limit number of rounds, is set to By setting ``5 times'' for ``jackpot A'', ``10 times'' for ``jackpot B'', and ``15 times'' for ``jackpot C'', the jackpot state is set. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

During jackpot opening of 109SGS027, the process is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this jackpot open processing, the processing for measuring the elapsed time after the first jackpot is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023, etc. , processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the first big winning port from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the first big winning opening to the closed state, after executing the process of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG082 for the first big winning opening door 109SG701, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "6". ” is updated.

109SGS028 jackpot end processing is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is performed. It includes a process of waiting until time elapses, and a process of performing various settings (setting of a time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Specifically, in the jackpot end process, the type of the executed jackpot is specified. And when the specified jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" without setting the time saving flag. When the specified jackpot type is "jackpot B", a time-saving flag is set and a count initial value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "jackpot B" is set to a time-saving frequency counter to set a special figure. Update the value of the process flag to "0". In addition, when the identified jackpot type is "jackpot C", the time saving flag is set and the count initial value ("100" in the present embodiment) corresponding to "jackpot C" is set to the time saving frequency counter. To update the value of the special figure process flag to "0".

The small hit opening pretreatment of 109SGS029 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this small win opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the result of the variation display is "small win", the execution of the round is started in the small win game state and the second big winning hole 109SG712 is opened. It includes processing for setting. At this time, for example, based on the fact that the result of the variable display is a "minor win", the upper limit of the period in which the second big prize opening 109SG712 is opened is set to "1 second", and the upper limit number of rounds is set. By setting the number of opening times of the second big winning hole 109SG712 to "1 time", setting to be in a small hit state may be performed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8".

In the present embodiment, the number of openings of the second large winning opening 109SG712 is set to "1 time" in the small winning state, and the upper limit of the period in which the second large winning opening 109SG712 is opened is set to "1 second". However, the present invention is not limited to this. The upper limit of the period in which the winning opening 109SG712 is opened may be a period other than "1 second" as long as the game ball can win in the second big winning opening 109SG712.

The small hit opening process of S30 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". In this small hit open process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second big winning opening 109SG712 is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the second count switch 109SG024A, etc. Based on this, it includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the second big winning port 109SG712 from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the second large winning opening 109SG712 to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG083 for the second large winning opening door 109SG711, the value of the special process flag is set to " 9” is updated.

The small hit end process of 109SGS031 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small winning end processing corresponds to the period during which the ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the big winning game state is executed by the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It includes processing to wait until the waiting time elapses. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 20-25 are flowcharts showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. FIG. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control is performed (109SGS051). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (109SGS052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (109SGS053) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 109SGS054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the received command buffer. Incidentally, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 20-5) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (109SGS055). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, a performance random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a performance random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (109SGS056), and then the process proceeds to 109SGS052.

FIG. 20-26 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (109SGS055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pending effect process for controlling effects related to pending display and active display (109SGS072). In the pending effect processing in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, and the first reservation storage display area 109SG005D and the second It is possible to display the pending display in the active display area 109SG005F based on the update of the pending display in the 2 pending storage display area 109SG005U and the reception of the first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command. Further, in the pending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first starting winning effect and the second starting winning effect.

20-27(A) and 20-27(B), the first start winning effect means that the pending display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the active display area 109SG005F is active. During the variable display in which the display is displayed, when the start winning is generated in the first start winning opening, the hold display is moved from the character image 109SGC to the display position of the new hold display in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D. It is a production that moves and displays. In addition, the moving display of the pending display of the first start winning effect target is the position determined in advance based on the number of first special figure pending storage at the start of the first starting winning effect (suspended It ends by moving to a position determined according to the stored number).

In addition, the second start winning effect is, as shown in FIGS. 20-27(C) and 20-27(D), the first This is an effect of moving and displaying the active display from the character image 109SGC to the active display area 109SG005F via the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D when the start winning is generated in the start winning opening.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of 109SGS073 to 109SGS082 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is checked whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (109SGS074).

Decorative design variation start process (109SGS074): Control to start variation of decorative design. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during decoration design fluctuation (109SGS075).

Decorative symbol variation process (109SGS075): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) that constitutes the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol fluctuation stop process (109SGS076).

Decoration pattern variation stop process (109SGS076): Based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all patterns, the control to stop the variation of the decoration pattern and derive and display the display result (stopped pattern) is performed. conduct. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (109SGS077), the small hit display process (109SGS080) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

Big hit display process (109SGS077): After the fluctuation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the image display device 5. FIG. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process (109SGS078).

During jackpot game processing (109SGS078): Control during jackpot game. For example, when a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening or a designated command after opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds on the image display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing (109SGS079).

Big win end effect processing (109SGS079): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to inform the player that the big win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

Small hit display process (109SGS080): After the fluctuation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the image display device 5. FIG. Then, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning game processing (109SGS081).

Processing during small winning game (109SGS081): Control during small winning game is performed. For example, when receiving a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening or a designated command after opening the big winning opening, display control of the number of rounds on the image display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (109SGS082).

Small win end effect processing (109SGS082): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to inform the player that the small win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073) or the big hit display process (109SGS077).

In the present embodiment, when the above-described first start winning effect is executed, the first suspension memory is obtained by ending the variable display and starting a new variable display during the execution of the first start winning effect. The pending display number displayed in the display area 109SG005D may change (decrease). In such a case, as shown in FIGS. 20-28(A) to 20-28(E), the destination (stop position ) is re-determined, the first start prize-winning effect may be continued.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28 (A) to 20-28 (E), the end of the variable display and the start of a new variable display during the execution of the first start winning effect toward the holding 4 display position When the pending display displayed in the first pending storage display area 109SG005D is shifted based on the If the hold display is no longer displayed at the hold 3 display position), after re-determining the destination of the hold display for the first start winning effect in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D to the hold 3 display position, It is sufficient to continue the 1-start winning presentation.

In addition, during a specific effect, such as a ready-to-win effect during fluctuations in super reach, which suggests that the variable display result will result in a big win, the player can be made to pay attention to the ready-to-win effect by executing the first starting prize-winning effect. It's gone. Therefore, in the holding effect processing in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and 20-29 (B), the When a new start winning prize occurs at the 1 start winning opening, the first start winning effect is not executed, and only a new pending display is additionally displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D. It is possible to prevent the interest of the ready-to-win performance from being lowered by the 1-start winning performance.

(Modification 1)
In the present embodiment, as the appearance display of the present invention, the first starting prize effect and the second starting prize effect are executed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, if a new start winning occurs, The pending display may be displayed as the active display in the active display area 109SH005F without executing the second start winning effect, or the pending display may be changed from the character image 109SGC to the first pending storage display area 109SG005D as the second starting winning effect. may be moved directly to the active display area 109SG005F without going through. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the occurrence of a new starting prize until the active display is displayed in the active display area 109SG005F.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the white circular pending display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U, but the present invention is not limited to this. , a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue circle, a red circle, a white triangle, a white square, etc.) are provided as the display mode of these pending indications, and in which display mode is the pending indication displayed? It may be possible to execute a holding change effect that suggests the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) in the variable display corresponding to each holding display.

(Modification 2)
In this way, when the degree of expectation for a big win is changed according to the display mode of the suspension display, the display mode of the suspension display for the first start prize performance object may be changed during the first start prize performance. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-31(A) to 20-31(D) as a modification 2, a movable body is provided on the side of the image display device 5, and during execution of the first start winning effect By arranging the movable body on the movement path of the reserved display, the reserved display is hidden from the player. Then, by changing the display mode of the suspension display during the concealment, the display mode of the suspension display during the first start winning effect is changed (from the round white display to the star-shaped white display shown in FIG. 20-31 (D) display 109SG005H1). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which way the display mode of the pending display of the first start winning effect object will change, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present modification 2, the movable body hides the pending display of the first start prize effect target and changes the display mode of the pending display during the concealment, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 20-32(A) to 20-32(D), the pending display of the first start prize effect target is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable body. (character image 109SG005G shown in FIG. 20-32 (C)), and by changing the display mode of the pending display during the concealment, the change in the display mode of the pending display during the first start winning effect (circle 20-32(D) to square white display 109SG005H2 shown in FIG. 20-32D).

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The change of the set value of may be executable during the game. In addition, when changing the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 during the game, as shown in FIGS. After opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the lock switch 109SG0051 is turned ON to display the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor (first display unit 109SG029A), and then the game A store clerk or the like operates the setting changeover switch 109SG052 to change the numerical value displayed on the first display section 109SG029A.

Then, when the store clerk or the like of the game parlor presses the lock switch 109SG051, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A is set as a new set value of the pachinko game machine 1, and the RAM 102 is backed up. It should be stored in the area. In addition, after the new setting value is set, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, special figure reservation storage, normal figure reservation storage, game control flag setting unit 109SG152, game control timer setting unit 109SG153, Various flags and data stored in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155, etc. may be deleted.

In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a new suspension memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit due to the change in the set value, and the new variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to prevent the game from being released (the occurrence of a normal game hit) and the unfair big hit of the variation display result during execution. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, the big winning opening can be closed during the big winning game, or the variable winning ball device 6B can be closed if the variable winning ball device 6B is open. can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate benefits. Furthermore, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new set value, it is possible to prevent the pending memory from being erased even though the new set value is not set.

In addition, in this modified example 3, the configuration in which the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the setting value of the machine 1 can be changed, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the LED, etc. are performed based on the opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 being detected by the frame opening detection sensor (not shown). By providing an opening notification means capable of notifying that the game machine frame 109SG003 is being opened, it may be possible to prevent the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 from being illegally changed.

Furthermore, in the case where the opening notification means is provided in this way, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during the opening of the game machine frame 109SG003, and the game control data holding area 109SG150 When the pending memory is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150, the notification may be performed in a different reporting manner from the case where the pending memory is not stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150. By doing so, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened to change the setting value, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the pending memory is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 by the notification mode of the notification means. Since the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can recognize this, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed inappropriately.

Furthermore, in the modification 3, when the opening notification means is provided in this way, whether or not there is a holding memory in which the variation display result is a big win in the game control data holding area 109SG150 during the opening of the game machine frame 109SG003 is determined, and when it is determined that there is a holding memory in which the variation display result is a big hit, notification may be made in a different reporting mode from the case where it is determined that there is no holding memory in which the variation display result is a big hit. By doing so, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the game hall clerk or the like can easily recognize the presence or absence of the pending memory in which the variation display result is a big hit. You can prevent the value from being changed.

Furthermore, as in Modification 3, the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed during the game, and as in Modification 2, the display mode of the hold display can be changed from a white round shape to the white round shape. In the case where it is possible to change to a white triangle or square with a higher expectation of a big hit than , it is determined whether or not there is a pending display displayed with a white triangle or square while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, When it is determined that there is a pending display displayed with a white triangle or square, a notification may be made in a different reporting mode than when there is no pending display displayed with a white triangle or square. By doing so, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the waiting display is displayed in white triangles or squares with a higher expectation of big hits than in white circles. , etc., can be easily recognized, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed inappropriately.

In addition, in this modified example 3, a mode is illustrated in which the pending memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reserved memory may be cleared even when the setting values originally set in the pachinko game machine 1 are reset.

In addition, in the present modification 3, a mode is illustrated in which the pending memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), the timing when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. You can clear it. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the setting value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, in this modification 3, based on the fact that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 109SG712 are closed. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. The first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 109SG712 may be closed when the change process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably prevent the change of the setting value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, in the present modification 3, when there is reserved storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the game machine frame 109SG003 is open, a form is exemplified in which notification is performed by the notification means. The invention is not limited to this, and if there is a reserved memory in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the game machine frame 109SG003 is open, even if it is impossible to set a new set value in the pachinko game machine 1 Alternatively, setting a new setting value may be made more difficult by providing a more complicated change procedure than when there is no reserved memory in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the game machine frame 109SG003 is open. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the pending memory from being erroneously cleared by setting a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加

(Modification 4)
Further, in the present embodiment, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided with five display portions from the first display portion 109SG029A to the fifth display portion 109SG029E. 20-34(A) as a modification 4, the present invention is not limited to this. , the display monitor may not be provided with a display unit for displaying the setting values of the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base during display. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-34(B), the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 1 are colored in red, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 2 are colored in green, By displaying the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the setting value 3 in blue, it is possible to grasp which setting value the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base being displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 are. You can make it easier.

In addition, in the present embodiment and the present modification 4, the display monitor 109SG029 can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the setting value 1 by switching every 5 seconds, and the display changeover switch 109SG030 can be operated. Each time, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base at setting value 1 are switched at 5-second intervals. Although an example has been exemplified in which the role ratio and the base can be switched at intervals of 5 seconds, the present invention is not limited to this. Switching display of the continuous ratio at setting value 3 at 5-second intervals, switching display at setting value 1, role ratio at setting value 2, setting value 3 at 5-second intervals, and switching display at setting value 1 The base, the base at the set value 2, and the base at the set value 3 can be switched at intervals of 5 seconds each time the display switch 109SG030 is operated.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the present embodiment, the security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 109SG001a. good too. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35(A) and 20-35(B), a security cover 109SG500B consisting of a short piece 109SG500Ba and a long piece 109SG500Bb is attached to the board case 109SG201, for example. Then, the right end of the long piece 109SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 and a covering release position on the right side of the covering position. Set so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 109SG201, thereby locking through the through hole 109SG500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 109SG500Bb. The switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 may be made operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500B (long piece 109SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, and the horizontal direction with respect to the board case 109SG201 is closed. The pachinko game machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state by regulating the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 109SG201 to release the cover of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. The pachinko game machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35(A) and 20-35(B), when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the projection dimension of the security cover 109SG500B from the substrate case 109SG201 is L1. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid with respect to the board case 109SG201, thereby extending the projection dimension of the security cover 109SG500B from the board case 109SG201 to the length L2. (L2>L1).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-36(A), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened by rotating about a predetermined rotation axis, the security cover 109SG500B projects from the board case 109SG201. By sliding with respect to the board case 109SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (putting the pachinko game machine 1 in the permissible state), a pachinko game can be played by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 by a game arcade clerk or the like. The setting value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, unless the pachinko game machine 1 is slid (unless the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 109SG001a, making it impossible to close the game machine frame 109SG003. It's becoming

Therefore, in this modified example 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to prevent the game machine frame 109SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operating portion, thereby improving security.

In the state where the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 109SG001a and the game machine frame 109SG003, thereby restricting movement in the horizontal direction from the cover position. However, the security cover 109SG500B may be moved in the horizontal direction as long as the state of covering the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 with the security cover 109SG500B is maintained. .

(Modification 6)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 109SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. The cover position covers the right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, and is rotated from the cover position about the pivot 109SG500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 109SG003 and facing in the vertical direction. It may be rotatably pivoted between the covering release position. In such a case, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ca is locked by the locking portion 109SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 109SG001a, and the long piece 109SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 109SG051. The switch 109SG052 may be restricted from turning from the rear side to the rear side.

When the game machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500C is rotated around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 109SG201, thereby opening the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. can be made operable by releasing the covered state. That is, in the sixth modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500C (long piece 109SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052, and rotation is restricted. Thereby, the pachinko game machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 109SG003 is open, the security cover 109SG500C is rotated with respect to the board case 109SG201 around the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to open the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38(A), the security cover 109SG500C in Modification 6 rotates around the pivot 109SG500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the allowable state), thereby opening the game hall. The setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by the store clerk or the like operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. If the 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are not covered (if the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 109SG001a, closing the game machine frame 109SG003. has become impossible.

Therefore, in this modification 6, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, so the lock switch 109SG051 is set by the security cover 109SG500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, to prevent the game machine frame 109SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operating portion, thereby improving security.

(Modification 7)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the game machine frame 109SG003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed by opening 109SG003a. In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 109SG003a in this way, as a modification example 7, it is shown in FIGS. , a through-hole 109SG003b is formed in the lower part of the frame 109SG003 for a game machine, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 can be operated through the through-hole 109SG003b.

When the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 can be operated through the through hole 109SG003b in this manner, a door 109SG003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 109SG003b is provided, and when the door 109SG003c is closed, The operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-39(B) and 20-39(C), when the door 109SG003c is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 109SG003, the door 109SG003a is closed by closing the glass door frame 109SG003a. 109SG003c is held between the glass door frame 109SG003a and the game machine frame 109SG003 so that it can be opened and closed, so that the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed. can be strongly prevented, and security can be improved.

(Description of characteristic part 2 of the present embodiment)
Next, a characteristic portion 2 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a game machine in which set values can be changed like the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, setting information (set value value). However, in such a case, if the setting information is stored in the RAM 122 without any processing, or if a command including setting information that has not been processed is output from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12, the pachinko game machine The contents of the RAM 122 and the command output from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 are compared when the setting value of 1 is "1" and when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is "2" or "3". As a result, the value of the set value is easily analyzed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the set value into a set secret value, which will be described later, and outputs a command including the set secret value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 By converting the setting value specified from the command into a setting corresponding value to be described later and storing it, it is difficult to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Characteristic portion 2 in the present embodiment will be described below. As shown in FIGS. 20-40, as a production control command, a setting value designation command ( command D1XXH) is provided. In the setting value specifying command, different EXT data is set according to the setting secret value after changing the setting value.

In the set value change process (see FIGS. 20-21), the CPU 103 executes a set value conversion process for changing the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 to the set secret value. In the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41, the CPU 103 first specifies a new set value (set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) (109SGS301). Next, the CPU 103 converts the identified setting value into a setting value secret value (109SGS302).

In addition, in the processing of 109SGS302, the CPU 103 may, for example, convert the specified set value into a secret value using a conversion table as shown in FIGS. 20-42(1) and 20-42(2) . FIG. 20-42(1) is a diagram showing the conversion table A in which a value of 1 is set for each set value without regularity. When converting a setting value into a secret value using this conversion table A, for example, if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted into the setting secret value "150". , when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2", the setting value is converted into a setting secret value "41"; is converted to the set secret value "34".

FIG. 20-42(2) is a diagram showing a conversion table B in which a value of 1 having a specific regularity is set for each set value. When the setting value is converted to the setting secret value using this conversion table B, for example, if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "4". If the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "5", and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting Convert the value to the set secret value "6". That is, the conversion table B is a conversion table in which a value obtained by adding "3" to the setting value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is used as the setting secret value.

In the process of 110SG302, when conversion table A is used to convert setting values into setting secret values, each setting value is converted into a non-regular value (setting secret value). When outputting a setting value specifying command including the setting value to the performance control board 12, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze and falsify the set value (the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102). On the other hand, when the conversion table B is used in the processing of 109SGS 302 to convert the set value into the set secret value, each set value is converted into a value having regulation (set secret value). It is possible to reduce the processing load when identifying the set value from the set value secret value in the update process (see FIG. 20-45).

Also, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. Arithmetic conversion may be performed in which a value obtained by multiplying (calculation A) or dividing (calculation B) by a certain value such as "6" or "12" is set as a set secret value.

Furthermore, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42(4), a value obtained by adding (shift A) or subtracting (shift B) a predetermined numerical value from the specified setting value is used as the setting secret value. Transformation may be performed.

In the numerical shift conversion in shift A, for example, if the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "1", the set value is converted to the set secret value "12", and the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "13", and when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "14". That is, a value obtained by shifting the setting value by +11 may be used as the setting secret value. Further, in the numerical shift conversion in the shift B, for example, when the set value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "1", the set value is converted to the set secret value "0", and the set value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "1", and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "2". , that is, a value obtained by shifting the set value by -1 may be used as the set secret value.

In addition, in the processing of 109SGS302, as shown in FIG. 20-42(4), among consecutive 8-digit bits (00000000), the bit corresponding to the specified setting value is raised (changed from 0 to 1). ) value to be the set value secret value. Specifically, when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "00000001", and when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "2" may convert the setting value into the setting secret value "00000001", and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value may be converted into the setting secret value "00000100" (position A) If the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "1", the setting value is converted to the setting secret value "10000000", and if the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2", The setting value may be converted to the setting secret value "01000000", and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value may be converted to the setting secret value "00100000" (position B).

As described above, after the setting value is converted into the setting secret value by one of the methods shown in FIGS. and ends the set value conversion process (S109SGS303). It should be noted that the setting value designation command for which the transmission setting is performed in S109SGS303 is output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (S27). 20-43, the set value conversion process is executed at the timing when the lock switch 109SG051 is pushed by the store clerk in the game arcade, that is, at the timing when the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. do it.

Next, the aspect when the production|presentation control board 12 receives a setting value designation|designated command is demonstrated. FIG. 20-44 is a flow chart showing the command parsing process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 20-44, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (109SGS221;N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command at 109SGS221 (109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning designation command (109SGS222 ). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (109SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS223). For example, in the process of 109SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command may be set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit .

At 109SGS222, if the received command is not the first start winning designation command (109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (109SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (109SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (109SGS225). For example, in the process of 109SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception wait time for the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

At 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (109SGS226). At 109SGS226, if the received command is not a design designation command (109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at 109SGS227 (109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228). When it is the first reserved storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (109SGS229).

At 109SGS228, if the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command (109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (109SGS230; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (109SGS231).

After executing either of the processes 109SGS229 and 109SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undecided (109SGS232).

If the command received at 109SGS226 is a pattern designation command (109SGS226; Y), or if the command received at 109SGS227 is a variable category command (S227; Y), or any of the processes of 109SGS223, 109SGS225, and 109SGS232 are executed. After that, the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning time received command buffer 194A (not shown) (109SGS233), and the process returns to 109SGS221.

In addition, when the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) is received together with the fluctuation start command (first fluctuation start command or second fluctuation start command), the reservation storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient if the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the head of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command at 109SGS230 (109SGS230; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting value designation command (109SGS232). If the received command is a setting value specifying command (109SGS232; Y), the setting value updating process for storing the setting value specified from the setting value specifying command in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is executed (S109SGS233 ) and return to 109SGS21. If the received command in 109SGS232 is not a set value designation command (109SGS232; N), then after setting according to other received commands (109SGS234), the process returns to 109SGS221.

FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart showing set value update processing in command analysis processing. In the setting value update process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the setting value (the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) from the received setting value specifying command (110SGS311). In addition, in the process of 110SGS311, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting secret value from the received setting value specifying command, and in a method corresponding to the method in which the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting value secret value, the setting value The set value can be specified from the secret value.

For example, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the conversion table A, if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "150", the setting value is specified as "1", If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "41", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "34", the setting value is specified as "3". should be specified. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the conversion table B, if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "4", the setting value is specified as "1", If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "5", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6", the setting value is specified as "3". should be specified.

Further, when the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the operation A as the arithmetic conversion, the value obtained by dividing the set secret value specified from the set value specifying command by a predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the set value. Just do it. Further, when the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the operation B as the arithmetic conversion, the set value is specified by multiplying the set secret value specified by the set value specifying command by a predetermined conversion coefficient. Just do it.

When the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting secret value using shift A as the numerical shift conversion, if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "12", the setting value is specified as "1". If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "13", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "14", the setting value is specified as " 3” should be specified. When the CPU 103 converts the setting value into the setting secret value using shift B as the numerical shift conversion, if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "0", the setting value is specified as "1". If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "2", the setting value is specified as " 3” should be specified.

When the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the position A as the bit position conversion, if the set secret value specified by the set value specifying command is "00000001", the set value is specified as "1". If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "00000010", the setting value is specified as "2". 3” should be specified. When the CPU 103 converts the set value into the set secret value using the position B as the bit position conversion, if the set secret value specified by the set value specification command is "10000000", the set value is specified as "1". If the setting secret value specified by the setting value specifying command is "01000000", the setting value is specified as "2". 3” should be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified in 110SGS311 into one setting correspondence value corresponding to the specified setting value (110SGS312), and converts the setting correspondence value stored in the RAM 122 to the converted setting correspondence. The value is updated and stored, and the set value update process is terminated (110SGS313).

In the processing of 110SGS312 and 110SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value using, for example, a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc. shown in FIGS. The values may be converted into different values (setting corresponding values) and updated and stored in the RAM 122 . In this way, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified from the setting value specifying command received from the main substrate 11 into the setting corresponding value without updating and storing the setting value or the setting secret value in the RAM 122. By updating and storing the values in the RAM 122, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 will be analyzed and that values different from the setting values will be updated and stored in the RAM 122.

It should be noted that the method of converting the setting value into the setting corresponding value by the effect control CPU 120 in 110SGS312 may be the same as the method of converting the setting value into the setting confidential value in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing by the CPU 103. , can be different.

Furthermore, in this way, when the value corresponding to the set setting value (setting corresponding value) is updated and stored in the RAM 122, the effect control CPU 120 is changed after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. Over a predetermined period (for example, until the variable display is executed 100 times or until one hour elapses), it is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. good too. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-46, the image display device 5 is displayed for the above-described predetermined period after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on according to the setting correspondence value stored in the RAM 122. A background effect (set value suggesting effect) may be executed first thing in the morning to display spring, summer, and winter background images at different ratios as background images.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines spring, summer, or winter as an image to be displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 as a set value suggestion effect after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. At this time, if the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the image displayed as the background image is a winter image at a rate of 80%. 15% of the time, it is decided to be the spring image, and 5% of the time, it is decided to be the summer image. Further, when the setting correspondence value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value "2", the image displayed as the background image is determined to be a winter image at a rate of 60%, and at a rate of 30%. Spring images are determined, and summer images are determined at a rate of 10%. Then, when the setting correspondence value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value "3", the image displayed as the background image is determined to be a winter image at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 45%. Spring images are determined, and summer images are determined at a rate of 15%.

In this embodiment, the set value 1 is the most advantageous set value for the player, and the set value 3 is the most unfavorable set value for the player. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5 until the predetermined period elapses, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the setting value suggesting effect is exemplified by changing the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As an effect, a pachinko game is played by displaying specific characters, lines, etc. on the image display device 5 during variable display, during the jackpot game, at the end timing of the jackpot game, during variable display after a specific number of times (for example, 500 times). It may be an effect suggesting a set value set in the machine 1 . Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the setting value suggesting effect is executed until a predetermined period of time has passed since the pachinko game machine 1 was powered on, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the set value suggesting effect may be an effect that can be executed regardless of the period after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the setting value conversion process, the CPU 103 converts the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting secret value using a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, or the like. Although the form of conversion is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be converted into the setting secret value using two or more methods.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 uses a method such as a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc., to set the setting value specified from the setting value designation command in the setting value update process. Although an example of conversion into a setting corresponding value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. , numeric shift conversion, bit position conversion, or a setting value specified by a setting value specifying command may be converted to a setting correspondence value using two or more methods. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value designation command including a set hidden value obtained by converting the setting value to the effect control board 12. Then, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified from the setting value specifying command into the setting corresponding value and stores it in the RAM 122, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine When a new setting value is set to 1, only one of the conversion of the setting value to the setting secret value by the CPU 103 and the conversion of the setting value to the setting corresponding value by the effect control CPU 120 is executed. good too. When the CPU 103 does not convert the set value into the set secret value, the CPU 103 outputs a set value designation command including the set value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 designates the set value. A setting value specified from a command may be converted into a setting corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122 . Further, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the setting value to the setting corresponding value, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value specifying command including the setting secret value converted from the setting value to the effect control board 12, and the effect The control CPU 120 may store the setting values specified from the setting value designation command in the RAM 122 as they are.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The reach effects of super reach C and super reach D as suggestive effects can be executed, and when executing the reach effects of super reach C and super reach D, the reach of super reach C and super reach D are executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-reach C and super ready-to-reach D is notified from the start of the performance, the title 31AK007 corresponding to the ready-to-reach performance can be notified, and the effect of the performance can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, Super Reach production (for example, displaying enemy characters or By executing the performance suggesting the character, the performance effect is improved, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance.

The present embodiment also includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. The setting suggestion effect is controlled by notification, and the effect control board for controlling these setting suggestion effect controls the progress of the game by controlling the effect rather than the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case and analyze it than the game control board that is used, if the setting value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect is performed. There was a problem that there was a fear of being overwhelmed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing shown in FIGS. 20-21) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the background effect (set value suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 20-46 in the morning) When,
with
The game control means, as the control information that can specify the setting value, setting value control information including a secret value that is a numerical value different from the setting value set by the setting means and converted from the setting value (for example , setting value designation command) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the command control processing (S27) after executing the processing of 110SG303 of the setting value conversion processing),
The performance control means stores a secret value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the processing of 110SG313 of the set value update processing shown in FIG. 20-45. part to be executed), and an effect related to the set value specified from the secret value can be executed (for example, until 1 hour has passed since the pachinko game machine 1 was turned on, or 100 times of variable display is executed) The part that executes the background production (setting value suggestion production) in the morning until it is done)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIGS. , a portion that converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42(1) and the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42(2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the setting value (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the calculation conversion (calculation A or calculation B) shown in FIG. 20-42 (3))
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting the specific bit value corresponding to the setting value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIGS. 20-41, the CPU 103 - The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in 42 (5))
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the setting value by a predetermined number (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, a setting value specifying command capable of specifying the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board that performs the effect, and the setting value is sent to the effect control board. The setting suggestion effect is controlled by notification, and the effect control board for controlling these setting suggestion effect controls the progress of the game by controlling the effect rather than the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case and analyze it than the game control board that is used, if the setting value stored in the effect control board is tampered with, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect is performed. There was a problem that there was a fear of being overwhelmed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing shown in FIGS. 20-21) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Production control means for controlling production based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
The game control means can transmit set value control information (for example, set value designation command) including the set value as the control information (for example, the command the part that executes the control process (S27)),
The effect control means converts the set value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means into a secret value that is a numerical value different from the set value and stores it (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the processing of 110SG313 of the setting value update processing shown in FIG. (For example, until one hour has passed since the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or until 100 times of fluctuation display is executed, the background effect (set value suggesting effect) is performed in the morning. part to execute)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the secret value are associated (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIGS. , a portion that converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42(1) and the conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42(2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the conversion processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the setting value (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the calculation conversion (calculation A or calculation B) shown in FIG. 20-42 (3))
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting the specific bit value corresponding to the setting value to 1 (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIGS. 20-41, the CPU 103 - The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in 42 (5))
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the setting value by a predetermined number (for example, in the processing of 110SGS302 of the setting value conversion processing shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) The part that converts the setting value to the setting secret value using the numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for conversion and prevent the setting values from being tampered with.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as an opening/closing member, the game machine frame 109SG003 capable of opening and closing the opening of the outer frame 109SG001a and the glass door frame 109SG003a capable of opening and closing the front surface of the game machine frame 109SG003 are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing the front opening of the housing like a slot machine. Moreover, not only the one that can be opened and closed by turning, but also the one that opens and closes by sliding or attaching and detaching may be used.

In the above-described embodiment, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are applied as an operation unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of them may be used, or other operation units such as other switches, buttons, levers, dials, touch sensors, etc. having different operation modes (for example, pull operation, push operation, rotation operation, etc.) may be used.

In the above-described embodiments, the security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, and 109SG500C are used as the restricting members. Even if it is not a covering member, the shape, size, material, etc. can be changed variously as long as it is a member capable of regulating the operation of the operating portion. More specifically, for example, instead of covering the operation portion, the operation portion may be regulated by contacting the operation portion.

In the above-described embodiments, the security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, and 109SG500C serving as restricting members only need to make it difficult to operate by covering the operating unit in the restricted state of the operating unit, and are not necessarily inoperable. It does not have to be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the main board 11 is mounted with a setting switching main body having operation portions such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , may be provided on a substrate separate from the main substrate 11, may be accommodated in a case other than the substrate case 109SG201, or may not be accommodated in the substrate case 109SG201.

In modifications 5 and 6, the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C as regulating members exemplify a form in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 cannot be closed while in the cover release position, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, an interlocking mechanism or the like that interlocks according to the closing operation of the game machine frame 109SG003 is provided so that the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C return from the uncovering position to the covering position. good too.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the substrate case 109SG201 provided with the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is provided in a position where it is difficult to operate when the game machine frame 109SG003 is closed, a place other than the back of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the glass door frame in front of the game machine frame 109SG003 109SG003a, or in the outer frame 109SG001a).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to change the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 based on the fact that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 109SG051 are ON (the setting change process is executed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processes may be executed according to the ON/OFF combination of the clear switch and lock switch 109SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 109SG051 is ON, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed (executing the setting confirmation process), and the clear switch is ON. If the lock switch 109SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and if both the clear switch and the lock switch 109SG051 are OFF, recovery processing from power failure (recovery processing shown in FIG. 3). should be executed. During execution of the above-described setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, variable display of special symbols, shooting of game balls, various lotteries such as whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit, jackpot type, payout of prize balls, etc. It suffices if the control is performed in a game stop state in which no processing is executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to an image display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, and according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

(Description of characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 3 of this embodiment will be described. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment is omitted because it is the same as the characterizing portion 31AK described above. As shown in FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2, the main board 11 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. The main board 11 also has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, or a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed. A setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting change state.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting-switching switch 122SG052, is accommodated in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 122SG051 and the setting-switching switch 122SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

Since the substrate case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 3 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch that can perform a switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) using a setting key. In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be used as one key.

Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 122SG003 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 21-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 3 in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 21-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 21-3(A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big win" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C". The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value change operation (that the pachinko game machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for confirming the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 to the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 21-4, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 21-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 21-5 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and variation A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 21-5, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variation display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into the types of fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random number value for pattern type determination, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is based on this. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. When the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-ready-to-lose after being executed twice, a variation pattern that results in super-ready-to-lose by performing pseudo-continuous effect three times may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-6(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. Display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in -6 (C), big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), big hit type determination shown in FIG. In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, the losing variation pattern determination table, the normal figure display result determination table (not illustrated), the normal figure variation pattern determination table (not illustrated) ), etc., are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big win and the small win changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, so that the winning probability of the big hit and the small hit (ball output rate) changes. It's becoming The setting value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, where 1 is the highest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the higher the value is in the order of 2 and 3, the lower the advantage is in stages. In other words, the smallest set value, 1, is the most unfavorable value for the game arcade, and 2, 3, which increase in order, are more advantageous for the game arcade.

FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), normal state or time saving state (low probability state) More judgment values than when , are assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, 1/99 when the setting value is 1, 1/150 when the setting value is 2, and 1/200 when the setting value is 3) In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state increases (in the feature part 3 of the present embodiment, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1/50, and the set value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/150 for a set value of 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in each display result determination table, if the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), the special figure display result is set as "small hit" Determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control to a small hit game is the same (for example, if the set value is 1/50, if the set value is 2, 1/99, set value is 3, then 1/200).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is the "big win" or "small win", and the big win game state or the small win is achieved. When the game state is controlled, the probability of being determined is high, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set as "big win" or "small win", and the big win game state or small win game is played. Determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control to the state is low (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 1>setting value 2>setting value 3).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with any of the hit determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 21-6(A) to 21-6(C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1), the winning probability of the small win is the same. may be

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. However, a big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually determined whether the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. good too. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, but shown in FIG. 21-6 (C) The display result determination table (the display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3) may not have a determination value assigned to the small hit. In other words, the fact that the ratio of the small-hit probability differs according to the set value includes that the small-hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

Figures 21-7 (A) and 21-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Among these, FIG. 21-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 21-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning port (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 21-8. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as the non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low-probability high base state and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. is 3, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C (no judgment value is assigned to the jackpot B). Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the big win type is determined as the big win B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of a big hit or a small hit increases, and the big win C as a big win type is determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. .

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the variation pattern determination table includes a big hit variation pattern determination table that is used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result will be a "big hit", and a variation display result that will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a change pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "losing" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 21-9 (A) and 21-9 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is "1", the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to Up to 300 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 350 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 351 to 825 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 400 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 21-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is “1”, , 0 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 150 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 151 to 450 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 200 out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is "1", "2", or "3", MR3 Of the range of judgment values 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to small hit variation patterns (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, The small hit variation pattern may be determined at different ratios from a plurality of variation patterns with set values "1", "2", and "3".

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and a low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the loss variation pattern determination table A, non-shortening non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-loss.

As shown in FIG. 21-10 (A), in the change pattern determination table A for losing (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 900 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 400 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 450 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the change pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the change pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 21-10 (B), in the change pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 500 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 21-10 (C), in the change pattern determination table C for loss (for the number of total pending memories in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 500 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 550 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value to the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 21-10 (D), in the losing variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 0 to 500 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 550 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It becomes lower in the order of 3. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α loss fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β loss, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the non-execution of the variable display by .

In addition, the "common decision ratio" in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment means that the decision ratio is completely the same with different setting values (this embodiment), and the decision ratio with different setting values are the same (for example, between the setting values 1 to 3, the determination ratio of the super reach fluctuation pattern differs by about 1%).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, the present invention It is not limited to this, and if the result of the variable display is a loss, regardless of the set value that has been set, the determination ratio of all the variable patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same. Also, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern regardless of the set value is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss It may be the same regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the determination ratio of the super reach β loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern regardless of the set value is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value It may be the same regardless of the setting value in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach varies depending on the set value. Depending on the current set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

It should be noted that the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation is more than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 21-5). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach-losing variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally winning a starting prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting winnings that are not stored in pending memory, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, a non-reach loss variation pattern with a long variation time and no reduction ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display is lengthened, and thus it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of special symbols, or the number of reserved memories of second special symbols when performing variable display of second special symbols.

Further, in each losing variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the super reach losing variation pattern The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variation display that is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) appearance rate) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the ratio of the fluctuation display to be executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display of the super reach loss is at the same rate. You may make it perform by a fluctuation pattern.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 21-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Based on the random number MR1 for determining the variation display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern as reserved data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Based on the random number MR1 for determining the variation display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern as reserved data, The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is periodically calculated according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (122SGSa0022). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), proceed to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In the power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N),

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . 122SGSa005 determines whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decreased by 1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the effect control board startup start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa008; N), the period until the effect control board 12 is started by executing 122SGSa007 again is waited. In addition, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa008; Y), set value confirmation processing for displaying the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the game parlor clerk or the like displays the set values. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa008; N) or after the set value confirmation process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs recovery processing for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of power supply stop. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

At 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets the effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decreased by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa016; N), it waits for a period until the effect control board 12 is activated by executing 122SGSa015 again. In addition, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa019).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa019; N), the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated by cold start, and transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

Furthermore, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (122SGSa020) for changing the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 . Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 21-12 is a flowchart showing setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 21-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

In addition, when the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value check end notification command to the effect control board 12. It is transmitted and the setting value confirmation processing is terminated (122SGSa035).

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing), the state becomes the same as when starting with a normal hot start. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 21-13A is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), CPU 103 designates the second address from the top in RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or if the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), specify the top address in the RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" in the specified address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), by setting "00H" to the address F000, the pachinko machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047); ;Y) terminates the RAM clearing process.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area as shown in FIG. 21-13(B). Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, in other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko game machine 1 was started, special figure suspension storage and general figure suspension Memory, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored.

In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment means that when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, addresses (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) where the setting values are stored ) to clear data other than the set value, and if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or if there is no backup data, all addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102 store "00H". This is a process of clearing all data including setting values by storing the .

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the setting value is stored in the top address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. good too. When the set value is stored at the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, when the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. , and "00H" is stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address just before the address F000.

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the form of clearing the data except the setting value of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment) is cleared. can be

Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the form of storing the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process of storing and reading clear switch backup information in RAM 102 by storing it in a register of microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). may be omitted so that the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced. In addition, when storing the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when storing the clear switch backup information in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten by other information (data) due to processing.

FIG. 21-14 is a flow chart showing the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before starting the set value change process (at the timing when it is determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the set value stored at address F000 (see FIG. 21-13(B)) in RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 are updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more disadvantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more disadvantageous to the player than "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in address F001 of RAM 102 as a set value. When the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. A process for displaying the setting values stored in the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF at 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 at address F000. In other words, the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored at the address F001 (temporary setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the setting value stored at the address F001 to the actual setting value. (changes the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value designation command corresponding to the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the form of transmitting the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 within the setting change process is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after finishing the setting change process).

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, by turning off the lock switch 122SG051, a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 (temporary setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of game balls into the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. A new setting value may be set in the pachinko game machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of .

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started from cold start or started in the setting change state, the cold start notification command and setting value change start to the effect control board 12 Although the form of executing the RAM clearing process before sending the notification command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process sends a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending a command or setting value change start notification command.

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the RAM clear processing is executed again (setting values other than those stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 are data). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started with incorrect data stored in the RAM.

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state, after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017), it is started A form of transmitting a command (cold start notification command, set value change start notification command and set value change end notification command) according to the state to the effect control board 12 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start or in a setting change state, a command (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change After transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12, the common RAM clear processing may be executed.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-15, the CPU 103 first executes power interruption detection processing (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt processing, and then executes switch processing (S21) to command control processing (S27). . As shown in FIG. 21-16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value is input. (122SGSa051). When there is no power-off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Next, the effect control main processing in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-17 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the production control board 12. circuit) registers, etc. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception wait timer times out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After receiving the input of information, clear the information stored in the RAM 122 including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., and proceed to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (122SGS407). If the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of jackpots, , information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) is cleared (122SGS408), and the clearing of the information stored in the RAM 102 and the clearing of the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are also confirmed. RAM clear notification processing for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clearing notification process, the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko game machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to inform the store clerk or the like of the game parlor that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (122SGS407;N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the setting value change start notification command (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, it is notified that the setting value is being changed (notification during setting value change ) is executed (122SGS411). Incidentally, the state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the game machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the game parlor clerk or the like who changes the setting value does not operate the main board 11 This is a state in which the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the is being visually recognized. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the store clerk or the like who changes the setting value. It is considered that it is impossible to judge whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state or not from the display of the device 5 . Therefore, as a setting value changing notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 9 notify the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change state to the game parlor clerk who changes the setting value. It's good to inform you that it is.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received, that is, whether or not the setting value of the setting value is completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 value) is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of "1" to "3" corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). After executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the setting value changing notification is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value change notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value change notification, or the RAM may be cleared after the setting value change notification is completed. Notification may be performed.

Also, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether it has started (122SGS414). If the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation in-progress notification process is performed to notify that the setting confirmation state (that the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is received. Execute (122SGS415). In addition, in the notification process during setting value confirmation, the display of the image on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., are used to activate the pachinko game machine 1, and It suffices if the surroundings of the pachinko game machine 1 can be notified of the setting confirmation state. In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the setting value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the processing of 122SGS405, hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

Thus, in the effect control main process in the feature part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While clearing the number of fluctuations after receiving the input of the player information, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. from the RAM 122, the performance information (the number of fluctuations since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big hits, number of super reach, etc.) and set value information (one of "1" to "3" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated memory).

That is, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the information cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the player information and the performance information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, 2 exemplifies a mode in which the player information and the performance information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game The player information and performance information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 21-17, at 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change end notification command, and setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial pattern according to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new setting value. If it is not set, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns in combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left as initial patterns. Also, if the received command is a setting value change completion notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the initial symbol on the image display device 5 is " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as the initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. When set, a combination of "4", "5", and "6" is used as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when a set value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as the initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial pattern displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Also, when a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set and when a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speaker 8L, 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be varied.

Then, returning to FIG. 21-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the pre-reading regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interrupt from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The pachinko game machine 1 has a different activation notification mode depending on the presence.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when no new setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 and the 30-second emission start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, when the setting value change end notification command is received, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image to the effect that the change of the set value is completed) on the image display device 5. to run. The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting the display of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the setting value change end notification command is received, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It means outputting C and displaying a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 .

Incidentally, as described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing in the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko game Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko machine 1 is started by hot start), and the cold start notification command is received. is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state). The period is 40 seconds.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5 are used to notify the startup when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall or a counter for each machine, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up. As an activation notification when the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated, a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the device for executing the activation notification is partially common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. (in any case, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot. Depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the image display device 5 , a message image may be displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In some cases, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko game machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, only some of the speakers output sound), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the game machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be changed according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the start-up notification process, the form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in a form in which it is executed even when any of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, and setting value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to these commands, and the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if received, the pachinko machine 1 A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, different modes of start-up notification are executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or the pachinko game machine 1 Although a form in which different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these initialization effects are The mode of activation notification and the combination of decoration patterns may all be different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, when it is started by cold start, when it is started in the setting change state, when it is started in the setting confirmation state also exemplifies a mode of executing start notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 21-17, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 21-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (122SGS431). If there is no power-off signal input (122SGS431; N), the process is terminated. The included backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 21-17, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the received command buffer. Incidentally, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 21-3) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (122SGS424). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, production random number update processing (122SGS425) for updating the count value of the counter for generating production random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (122SGS425), player information input processing (122SGS426) for accepting input of player information, game A player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting player information and an effect information totaling process (122SGS428) for totalizing effect information are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variation display, the big win game, and the super reach.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time a variation display, a big hit game, and a super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 21-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441). If the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after executing the prefetch advance notice setting process (S161), any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag or

In addition, if the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442 ). If the value of the effect control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag When the process is executed and the value of the production control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the prefetch regulation counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 ( 7) is executed. By executing the processing of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started, so that four fluctuation displays are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process (Fig. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over the four times of the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by cold start or started in the setting change state, based on the fact that the game is possible, As a setting, a mode is exemplified in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four times of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and setting is made as to whether the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated by a cold start. Regardless of whether or not the game is started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game is possible, as settings related to the progress of the game, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC It is also possible to set the production settings, etc., to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The reach effects of super reach C and super reach D as suggestive effects can be executed, and when executing the reach effects of super reach C and super reach D, the reach of super reach C and super reach D are executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-reach C and super ready-to-reach D is notified from the start of the performance, the title 31AK007 corresponding to the ready-to-reach performance can be notified, and the effect of the performance can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes a fourth invention described below. In other words, there is a conventional game machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351, if the game information is unintentionally deleted due to a change in the setting value, the store where the gaming machine is installed or the player may There is a possibility that it may give a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control progress of the game;
Informing means that can inform in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation informing process in the eighth modification),
with
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 performs part that executes RAM clear processing),
The predetermined operations include a setting change start operation (for example, turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). operation) and
When the setting change start operation is performed, the setting means becomes capable of the setting change operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as modification 8, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON ( 122SGSa054a; Y), the portion where the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), the setting changed by the setting change operation is performed by performing the setting change completion operation after the setting change operation that has become possible. Setting a value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 as Modified Example 8, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the processing of 122SGSa058),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. is received (122SGS410; Y), the part that executes the setting value change confirmation notification process)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being unintentionally erased by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of the fourth invention,
If the setting change completion operation is performed without the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means changes the game information stored in the game information storage means. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 as Modified Example 8, after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch is not operated (122SGSa054d; N), it is further determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. In this case, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the set value change process is terminated without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). )
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fourth invention,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is terminated without the setting change completion operation (for example, FIG. 21 as a modified example 8). -25, the part where the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the set value change confirmation notification process)
According to this feature, the operator can recognize the operation method for preventing the game information from being erased. Erasure can be further prevented.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the fourth invention,
The game control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, the erasing condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game stored in the game information storage means At least part of the information is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y) and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) part),
The notification means also performs the notification when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, the portion where the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 21-26 as the ninth modification).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the fourth invention,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production based on control information output from the game control means,
Production control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control means;
selection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the performance control storage means;
with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the selecting means selects not to execute erasing in the performance control storage means, the game information is stored. Erasing at least part of the game information stored in the means (for example, the part that clears only the RAM 102 as shown in Modification 10), and the erasing condition is established when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when it is selected by the selection means to execute erasing in the performance control storage means, at least part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. , at least part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, as shown in Modification 10, the part that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122)
According to this feature, when the erasing condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not erasure of the performance control storage means is executed along with the erasure of the game information storage means. can be selected.

The present embodiment also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, conventional pachinko gaming machines include those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, for example. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (when power supply to the gaming machine is started) command (control information) output from the main board (game control board) to the performance control board (performance control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory backed up by the main board (game control board) A command output from the main board to the performance control board for clearing the backed-up memory regardless of the memory backed up by the main board, and a state in which the set values of the game machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is turned on and activated, the effect control board will be able to make an appropriate command according to the activation state. There was a problem that it was not possible to execute such processing. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Control information (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 21-3) output from the game control means production control means (for example, production control CPU120 shown in FIG. 21-17 RAM clear a part that executes notification processing, notification processing during setting value change, notification processing during setting value confirmation, etc.);
with
After the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the game control means restores a first start-up based on the storage contents stored in the backup storage means as a start-up state when the power supply to the game machine is started. A state (e.g., hot start), a second activation state (e.g., cold start) in which the memory contents are erased and restored regardless of the memory contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , and outputs different control information corresponding to the activation state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 and 21-14 When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started, the CPU 103 transmits a hot-start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the CPU 103 sends the effect control board. 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when power supply is started. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of the fifth invention,
A production control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control means,
Depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state, information to be erased among the information stored in the performance control storage means is different ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 21-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state)
According to this feature, appropriate erasure can be performed according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fifth invention,
Said game control means is capable of outputting control information (for example, setting value change end notification command) specifying the end of said third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the termination of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-20). Thus, based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process. Then, a portion for displaying a 40-second message image (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the fifth invention,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the game machine is in an activation state in which the set value cannot be set by the specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the fifth invention,
The effect control means performs different controls according to the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, the effect control CPU 120 may 60 seconds of light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process, and based on the reception of the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 60 seconds of light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process, and based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control for A portion in which the CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, display the decoration pattern as an initial pattern in a combination of "1", "2", and "3", or display the set value A part that displays decoration patterns as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as initial patterns based on the reception of the change end notification command)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state it is.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the fifth invention,
The game control means, when the set value is changed in the third activation state, erases the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for the specific information (for example, the As shown in 21-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the setting value, and the data after address F001 in RAM 102 except for the data of the setting value stored at address F000 are cleared).
According to this feature, it is possible to erase the backup information appropriately according to the change of the setting value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of the fifth invention,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 11, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before sending a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, effect A portion that executes RAM clear processing at the timing after sending the set value change start notification command to the control board 12)
According to this feature, game information can be erased at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventional pachinko gaming machines include those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, for example. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (when power supply to the gaming machine is started) When the main board clears the backed-up memory regardless of the backed-up memory (general activation state), and when the setting value of the game machine is made changeable (setting activation state) If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the normal activation state or the set activation state, and it is difficult to detect unauthorized setting changes of the gaming machine. rice field. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) capable of retaining stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Activation notification means capable of notifying the activation state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the activation notification process shown in FIGS. 21-17),
with
The game control means, as the activation state, a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and activated, and and a setting activation state (for example, setting change state) in which the setting is valid,
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIGS. , light emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, light emission of the game effect lamp, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and image part for executing the display of the message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of the sixth invention,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in modification 12, during the execution of the setting value change notification with high priority, the priority A part that does not execute RAM clear notification with low
According to this feature, since notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent fraud due to setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the sixth invention,
The activation notification means notifies the setting activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko game machine 1 The part where the notification period is 40 seconds when started in the setting change state)
According to this feature, an appropriate notification can be executed in a period corresponding to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the sixth invention,
The activation notification means is
A first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification means,
The setting activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 21-20),
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, the part that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the activation notification is executed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which activation state it is.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the sixth invention,
The game control means controls a game based on common settings (for example, Since the CPU 103 does not execute the starting winning judgment processing after the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the part for regulating the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed until the four times of the variable display. According to this feature, by executing game control with different settings, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as being recognized that the settings have been changed.

As described above, the characteristic part 3 in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made within the scope of the present invention. are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, after executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa017), the lock switch When 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and a new setting value can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. RAM clear processing may be executed based on the fact that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In this way, when the RAM clearing process is executed based on setting new setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change process, as shown in FIGS. In the process, the CPU 103 first transmits to the effect control board 12 a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change process (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and if the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON ( 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. In addition, when the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a set value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the setting switch 122SG052 (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 are updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more disadvantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more disadvantageous to the player than "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in address F001 of RAM 102 as a set value. When the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. A process for displaying the setting values stored in the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF at 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored at address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without the setting changeover switch 122SG052 being operated, a set value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when a set value (temporary set value) is stored at address 001 of RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the set value stored at address F001 are (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored at addresses F000 and F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is effect-controlled. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 and the setting change processing is terminated (122SGS061).

Also, when different setting values are stored in the addresses F000 and F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are changed, the setting values are stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The setting value is stored in the address F000, that is, the setting value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set setting value of the pachinko game machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. Execute the process (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. data) is cleared. After the RAM clearing process (122SGSa060) is executed, a set value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

FIGS. 21-24 are flowcharts showing part of the effect control main processing in the eighth modification. In the production control main process in the modification 8, the production control CPU120, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (122SGS 410a). If the first setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), proceed to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y) , a setting value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or a lock is displayed if the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIGS. 21-25(A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). If no setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the first setting value change start notification command or setting value change end notification command is waited. Also, if the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17).

In addition, when there is a reception of the second setting value change start notification command (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes setting value change notification processing for notifying that the setting value is being changed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If no setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, if the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If no setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b; N), proceed to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17); The setting value newly set in the pachinko game machine 1 (the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified setting value is set as the setting value information (“1” to “3” according to the setting value). value) in the RAM 122 (122SG413). It then proceeds to 122SGS 408 (see FIGS. 21-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production control main processing, so that the pachinko game machine is operated in a state in which the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. 1 is activated, as shown in FIG. 21-25(A), in the image display device 5, by changing the setting value, game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 are cleared, and the setting value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1.

In the state where the message image 122SG005M1 is being displayed on the image display device 5 in this way, when the store clerk or the like of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. , and the RAM 102 is not cleared. On the other hand, when the game hall clerk turns ON the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is being displayed on the image display device 5, the pachinko machine 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. is in the setting change state, and the fact that the setting value is being changed is notified by image display on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like.

Then, in the setting change state, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new set value by a store clerk or the like, or if a store clerk or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the store clerk or the like sets a new set value to the same value as the original set value. When the setting value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared as shown in FIG. 21-25(D). Instead, a combination of "1", "2" and "3" is displayed as an initial pattern on the image display device 5 as a decoration pattern. Furthermore, in the setting change state, when a game arcade clerk or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and the decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 as initial patterns in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

Further, in the eighth modified example, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a game hall clerk or the like with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on, thereby changing the setting value in the image display device 5, thereby changing the RAM 102. 122SG005M1 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 to the effect that the game information stored in the . However, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 as a ninth modification, pachinko is displayed on the image display device 5 by starting the pachinko game machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. The game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by starting the game machine 1 with a cold start, and an instruction to restart the pachinko game machine 1 is given when the pachinko game machine 1 is not started with a cold start. , message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start when a store clerk or the like of the game hall erroneously turns on the clear switch while trying to start the pachinko game machine 1 by hot start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being cleared unintentionally.

Further, in the eighth modification and the ninth modification, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or cold start. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a message image is displayed on the image display device 5 to determine whether or not to clear the RAM 102. Confirmation may be performed either when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or when it is activated by a cold start, or both.

Further, in the eighth modified example, the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a game hall clerk or the like with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on, thereby changing the setting value in the image display device 5, thereby changing the RAM 102. 122SG005M1 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 to the effect that the game information stored in the . It is not limited, but as shown in FIGS. 21-27 as a tenth modification, when the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started or the setting value is changed, The image display device 5 displays information indicating that the setting values have been changed and the RAM 102 has been cleared, and options for clearing the RAM 122 in response to the setting values being changed and the RAM 102 being cleared. In addition to displaying the message image 122SG005M3 including the above, a selection as to whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, when clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM clearing processing to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (resultingly Clear both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 immediately), and if clearing the RAM 122 is not selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (resultingly, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the above embodiment, the same timing (cold start notification command or setting timing before transmitting the value change start notification command), but the present invention is not limited to this. When starting with the start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before transmitting a cold start notification command to the performance control board 12, and when starting the pachinko game machine 1 in a setting change state, the performance control board 12. Timing after sending a set value change start notification command to (more specifically, after sending a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, after changing the set value) The timing of clearing the RAM 102 may be different between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state, such as executing RAM clear processing in .

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state. Although the form of executing the RAM clear notification process is exemplified to notify that (execute the RAM clear notification), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 12, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is being changed (executing the setting value changing notification), RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. Priority over each notification When a high priority notification (for example, set value change notification) is being executed, a low priority notification (for example, RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When priority is assigned to each notification in this way, a low-priority notification may be performed after a high-priority notification is performed. In this case, by executing the low-priority notification in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. may

Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, no setting is executed for the movable body 32 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases, confirmation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be performed in parallel with the above-described RAM clearing notification, set value changing notification, set value checking notification, and various activation notifications. . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, since the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, the confirming operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. can be performed.

It should be noted that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the startup mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be performed by a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, A set value change start notification command, a set value change end notification command, a set value confirmation start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, etc. may be executed from the point of time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed during the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 In this case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, priority is given to the execution of the setting value changing notification, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the new setting value is reflected in the game as it is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko game A new set value may be reflected in the game by starting the machine 1 by hot start. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted in this way and the new setting values are reflected in the game, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 , after slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position, the movable body 32 is moved again to the origin position, etc., and a confirming operation that can be executed in a relatively short period of time is executed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted, as confirmation operation of the movable body 32, after moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, the movable body 32 is moved again to the origin position, etc. Confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time. Actions may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above-described embodiment, the set value stored at the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific information that is not specified may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, the RAM 102 stores a setting value as specific information that is not cleared, a provisional setting value as information that is cleared, game information, etc., but the present invention It is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information such as set values that are not cleared, and the other RAM stores temporary set values, game Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the RAM of the other side (temporary setting values, game information, etc. are stored) according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to differentiate whether or not to clear the RAM in which the Furthermore, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102 .

In addition, as described above, if two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM that stores specific information that is not cleared such as the setting value is connected to a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) that is connected to a backup battery. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) as the RAM that stores temporary setting values, game information, etc., it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. You may make it possible to memorize without using.

Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, but the present invention is not limited to this. can be mounted on the By doing so, since it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic part 3, the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the setting value is mounted on the main board 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board 11, a display monitor 122SG051 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 to facilitate the operation of changing the set values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the setting value is mounted on the main substrate 11 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game When the machine 1 can calculate the role product ratio, the continuous role product ratio, etc., the display monitor 122SG051 may display the calculated role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main substrate 11. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) or a reset button mounted on the payout control board.

Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 exemplifies a form in which the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the above embodiment, the set value 1 is set to the most advantageous set value for the player, and the set value 3 is set to the most unfavorable set value for the player (the set value 1 is set to the most unfavorable setting value for the game hall). setting value 3 is the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player. The set value may be set to 3, and the set value 3 may be set to be the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 3, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), by setting "00H" to the address F000, the pachinko machine 1 is automatically set to the set value 1, that is, the pachinko game machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players illegally set the set value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute RAM clear processing (see FIG. 21-13 (A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102. is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 to be the most disadvantageous set value for the player, the pachinko machine 1 can start the game based on the CPU 103 executing the RAM clear processing when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an advantageous state, and the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 are the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output period, and the image. Although the form in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control related to notification at startup is different) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the above-described control related to notification at the time of start-up, the initial pattern (see FIGS. 21 to 19), background image, character , etc. (differences in the mode of presentation and the state of presentation after the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready to play) and the like, and whether or not to execute the confirmation operation of the movable body 32; It may include control related to the confirmation operation, such as different aspects of the confirmation operation and different execution periods. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention, the target to be controlled by the production control CPU120, the control mode of the production control CPU120, the control period of the production control CPU120, etc. may be controlled at least in part. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 3 of the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be played by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, for example, using a game value. can be started, and a variable display result is derived to an image display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, thereby ending one game, and the variable display derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be awarded depending on the results.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the title corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect is displayed from the start of the super ready-to-win effect (characteristic portion 31AK in FIGS. 1 to 19), the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. is operated to set one of a plurality of setting values in the pachinko game machine 1, and by opening and closing the game machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are set. A form that can be switched between an operable state and an inoperable state (features in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-39), and one of a plurality of set values for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the main board 11 (CPU 103) or can be set, and the set secret value converted from the set set value is stored in the RAM 102, and a suggestion effect (morning One background effect) can be executed (characteristic part 2 in FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46), and the effect control board 12 (effect control In addition to transmitting different commands to the CPU 120 for the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to execute start-up notification in different modes depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or when it is started with a setting change state. A form (feature 3 in FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27) for notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when changing the set value has been disclosed, but the pachinko game machine 1 includes Multiple features may be applied.

For example, when applying the characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 1 to 19 and the characteristic portion 2 of FIGS. The mode of the title corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win may be varied according to the set value. 20-40 to 20-46 and characteristic portion 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27 to the pachinko machine 1, the setting value is may store the set secret value.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on the display of a specified result,
setting permission state control means capable of controlling a setting permission state for permitting setting of a setting value relating to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state with a probability according to the set value;
game information storage means capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling production based on control information transmitted from the game control means;
a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the set set value;
with
The game control means transmits set value control information including a set specific value based on the set value that is different from the set value set in the setting permission state as the control information capable of specifying the set value. capable of transmitting control information specifying termination of the setting permission state;
The production control means stores a setting specific value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means, and is capable of executing production according to the setting value specified from the setting specific value, Based on the reception of the control information specifying the end of the setting permission state transmitted from the game control means, performing special control according to the end of the setting permission state,
The game information includes pending storage information regarding variable display that has not yet started,
When a new setting value is set in the setting permission state, the game information including the pending storage information is erased,
The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect that can be executed in a plurality of variable displays after the set value is changed as the suggestive effect, and an initial suggestive effect in the identification information after the set value is changed, unlike the first suggestive effect. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect that suggests a set value by display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images